US20210369007A1 - Product Securement and Management System - Google Patents
Product Securement and Management System Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20210369007A1 US20210369007A1 US17/342,907 US202117342907A US2021369007A1 US 20210369007 A1 US20210369007 A1 US 20210369007A1 US 202117342907 A US202117342907 A US 202117342907A US 2021369007 A1 US2021369007 A1 US 2021369007A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- product
- shelf
- window
- door
- barrier
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 claims description 8
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 abstract description 7
- 235000013350 formula milk Nutrition 0.000 abstract description 2
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 170
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 50
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 37
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 32
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 31
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 19
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 10
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000003014 reinforcing effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000010408 sweeping Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005389 magnetism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008054 signal transmission Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000003351 stiffener Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000005291 magnetic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000284 resting effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000452 restraining effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001953 sensory effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012190 activator Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004873 anchoring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000825 pharmaceutical preparation Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940127557 pharmaceutical product Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001737 promoting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F3/00—Show cases or show cabinets
- A47F3/002—Devices for protection against sunlight or theft
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F1/00—Racks for dispensing merchandise; Containers for dispensing merchandise
- A47F1/04—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs
- A47F1/12—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs dispensing from the side of an approximately horizontal stack
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F1/00—Racks for dispensing merchandise; Containers for dispensing merchandise
- A47F1/04—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs
- A47F1/12—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs dispensing from the side of an approximately horizontal stack
- A47F1/125—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs dispensing from the side of an approximately horizontal stack with an article-pushing device
- A47F1/126—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs dispensing from the side of an approximately horizontal stack with an article-pushing device the pushing device being urged by spring means
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F3/00—Show cases or show cabinets
- A47F3/004—Show cases or show cabinets adjustable, foldable or easily dismountable
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F3/00—Show cases or show cabinets
- A47F3/02—Show cases or show cabinets with dispensing arrangements
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F3/00—Show cases or show cabinets
- A47F3/12—Clamps or other devices for supporting, fastening, or connecting glass plates, panels or the like
- A47F3/125—Doors for show cases
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F3/00—Show cases or show cabinets
- A47F3/005—Show cases or show cabinets with glass panels
- A47F3/007—Cases or cabinets of the counter type
- A47F2003/008—Cases or cabinets of the counter type with pivoting front glass panel
Definitions
- the present invention relates generally to shelf assemblies for use in merchandising product and more particularly to shelf assemblies that improve the securement and management of merchandised product.
- the present invention is directed at overcoming these and other known drawbacks and problems with existing shelving systems.
- the present invention overcomes the above-mentioned problems by addressing the securement and management of product in a retail setting.
- the invention has the ability to inhibit “sweeping” of product by a thief and to limit the taking of large amounts of product from a shelf in a short period of time.
- the present invention will inhibit sweeping of product and the removal of numerous products at a time.
- the present invention also has the ability to alert store or security personnel and security cameras of a potential theft situation, while minimizing the impact on access to product by legitimate shoppers.
- a merchandising system comprises a base configured to support product, a housing configured to engage with the base, comprising a top wall, a first side wall, and a second side wall, a pusher movably mounted on the base, a rotatable window from a closed position to an open position about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the housing, and a trigger axle located adjacent to the hinge point of the window, wherein when the window is rotated, the trigger axle is rotated.
- the trigger axle may include a cantilever that is attached to the trigger axle.
- the merchandising system may further include an audio box configured to sound an alarm.
- the trigger axle and/or the cantilever may rotate against a switch trigger located on the audio box to sound the audio box.
- the merchandising system may include an audio box configured to sound an alarm, wherein the trigger axle includes a cantilever that is attached to the trigger axle, wherein when the window is rotated, the cantilever rotates against a switch trigger located on the audio box to sound the audio box.
- FIG. 1 depicts a front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a product securement and management system of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 depicts a partial side elevation view of the exemplary securement and management system of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 3 depicts a bottom view of an exemplary embodiment of a pullout shelf that may be used with the present invention.
- FIG. 4 depicts front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of the product securement and management system of the invention incorporating the pullout shelf.
- FIG. 5 depicts a side elevation view of an exemplary pullout shelf illustrating the product dividers and the restocking of product on the shelf.
- FIG. 6 depicts a side elevation view of an exemplary mounting of a front retaining wall and a secondary retaining wall to the shelf in addition to an exemplary pusher mechanism.
- FIG. 7 depicts a front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a front retaining wall and a secondary retaining wall.
- FIG. 8 depicts a front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a front retaining wall and a secondary retaining wall with product displayed on the shelf.
- FIG. 9 depicts a bottom view of an exemplary alert device mounted to the exemplary securement and management system of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 10 depicts an exemplary lock mechanism that may be used with the present invention.
- FIG. 11 depicts an exemplary embodiment of a movable barrier and barrier extension that may be used with the present invention.
- FIG. 12 depicts a close up view of the movable barrier and barrier extension of FIG. 11 .
- FIG. 13 depicts a close up view of an exemplary handle that may be used with the movable barrier or barrier extension of FIG. 11 .
- FIG. 14 depicts a close up view of the movable barrier and barrier extension of FIG. 11 defining an opening and mounting structure for receiving the lock mechanism of FIG. 10 .
- FIG. 15 depicts a partial front elevation view of the exemplary securement and management system of FIG. 1 including the use of a security camera.
- FIG. 16 depicts a partial front elevation view of the exemplary securement and management system of FIG. 1 including the use of a video monitor.
- FIG. 17 depicts a diagram of an exemplary switching operation between a camera image and an image from a video player on the monitor of FIG. 16 .
- FIG. 18 depicts another exemplary lock mechanism that may be used with the present invention.
- FIG. 19 depicts another view of the exemplary lock mechanism of FIG. 18 .
- FIG. 20 depicts a back view of the exemplary lock mechanism of FIG. 18 .
- FIG. 21 depicts yet another exemplary lock mechanism that may be used with the present invention.
- FIG. 22 depicts another view of the exemplary lock mechanism of FIG. 21 .
- FIG. 23 depicts a close-up view of the lock plate of the exemplary lock mechanism of FIG. 21 .
- FIG. 24 depicts another view of the lock plate of FIG. 23 .
- FIG. 25 depicts an exemplary embodiment that includes the use of a clip that may be used to further secure a side wall to the shelf.
- FIG. 26 depicts an isometric view of the clip of FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 27 depicts a close-up view of the mounted clip of FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 28 depicts an exemplary electrical power bar that may be used with the invention.
- FIG. 29 depicts another view of the power bar of FIG. 28 .
- FIG. 30 depicts an exemplary embodiment that includes a side wall that may be used to provide further security for product on a shelf or a portion of a shelf.
- FIG. 31 depicts another view of the wall of FIG. 30 .
- FIG. 32 depicts an isometric view of a clip that may be used to further secure a side wall to the shelf.
- FIG. 33 depicts another view of the clip of FIG. 32 .
- FIG. 34 illustrates an isometric view of an embodiment of a box shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 35 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an embodiment a box shelf with a slideable shelf in a second position in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 36 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an embodiment a box shelf with a slideable shelf in a first position in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 37A-37B depict cross-sections of an embodiment of a hinge plate engaging a blocking lip in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 38 depicts an embodiment of two box shelves stacked on top of each other in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 39 illustrates a partial exploded view of an embodiment of a box shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 40A-40D illustrate various views of an embodiment a housing in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 41 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a housing and a door in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 42-45 illustrate views of an embodiment of a box shelf with various features omitted to provide additional details in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 46 illustrates a cross-section of a slideable shelf with a divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 47 illustrates a partially exploded view of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 48A-48C illustrate various view of an embodiment of a support surface of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 49 and 50 depict cross-sections of a portion of an embodiment of support surface of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 51 illustrates an embodiment of a portion of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 52A-52C illustrates an isometric, partially exploded view of an embodiment of a hinge plate and construction in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 53A-53E illustrate a number of views of an embodiment of a hinge plate in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 54A-54F illustrate a number of views of an embodiment of a hinge base configured to couple with the hinge plate of FIG. 53 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 55A-55D illustrate a number of views of an embodiment of a shelf support in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 56 illustrates a cross-section of portions of a shelf support configured to engage vertical rails in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 57 illustrates a cross-section of an embodiment of a rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 58A-58E illustrate various views of an embodiment of a housing of a box shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 59A-59D illustrate various view of an embodiment of slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 60 is a side view of an exemplary low profile shelf support.
- FIG. 61 is an exploded isometric view of a shelf system incorporating the low profile shelf support of FIG. 60 .
- FIG. 62 is another exploded isometric view of a shelf system incorporating the low profile shelf support of FIG. 60 .
- FIG. 63 is a side view of a shelf system incorporating the low profile shelf support of FIG. 60 and an alert device and moveable barrier.
- FIG. 64 is a partial enlarged view of the shelf system of FIG. 63 further illustrating the moveable barrier in contact with a linkage which is also in contact with the alert device.
- FIG. 65 is a partial enlarged view of the shelf system of FIG. 63 further illustrating the alert device in contact with a linkage which is also in contact with the moveable barrier.
- FIG. 66 is an isometric view of the shelf system of FIG. 61 with a box shelf mounted to the shelf.
- FIG. 67 is an isometric exploded view of the box shelf of FIG. 66 .
- FIG. 68 is a side view of the shelf system of FIG. 66 .
- FIG. 69 is a partial enlarged view of the shelf system of FIG. 68 .
- FIG. 70 is an isometric view of the shelf system of FIG. 61 with signage mounted to the shelf.
- FIG. 71 is a side view of the shelf system of FIG. 70 .
- FIG. 72 is an isometric exploded view of the shelf system of FIG. 61 with multiple low profile shelf supports and with optional mounting brackets.
- FIG. 73 is an isometric view of the shelf system of FIG. 72 .
- FIG. 74 is an isometric view of an adjustable wall that may be used to provide further security for product on a shelf or a portion of a shelf.
- FIG. 75 is a side view of the adjustable wall of FIG. 74 .
- FIG. 76 is an end view of the adjustable wall of FIG. 74 .
- FIG. 77 is an isometric view of the adjustable wall of FIG. 74 .
- FIG. 78 is another isometric view of the adjustable wall of FIG. 74 .
- FIG. 79 is an isometric view of an exemplary merchandising system.
- FIG. 80 is another isometric view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 .
- FIG. 81 front view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 .
- FIG. 82 is a side view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 .
- FIG. 83 is a partial side view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 .
- FIG. 84 is a top view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 .
- FIG. 85 is another front view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 .
- FIG. 86 is another front view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 illustrating product being removed from the merchandising system.
- FIG. 87 is another isometric view of the merchandising system of FIG. 79 illustrating product being moved toward the front end of the merchandising system.
- FIG. 88 is a bottom view of an exemplary merchandising system.
- FIG. 89 is a partial bottom view of the merchandising system of FIG. 88 .
- FIG. 90 is a side view of an exemplary merchandising system.
- FIG. 91 is another side view of the merchandising system of FIG. 90 illustrating product being removed from the merchandising system.
- FIG. 92A is partial exploded view of an embodiment of a merchandise system in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 92B is an isometric view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 93 is a side view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 94 is a side view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 95 is a side view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 96 is a side view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 97 is a side view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 98A is a partial bottom view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 98B is a partial bottom view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 99 is a side view of the merchandise system of FIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention illustrating the opening of the door.
- FIG. 100 is an isometric view of multiple merchandise systems with an electronic control unit in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 101A-C depict an alternative embodiment of the door spacer bar of the invention.
- FIGS. 102 through 106E depict various views of an alternative embodiment of a merchandise system in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 102 is an isometric view of an alternative embodiment of a merchandise system in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 103A is a front view of the merchandise system illustrated in FIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 103B is another isometric view of the merchandise system illustrated in FIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 103C and 103D are isometric views of a track of the of the merchandise system illustrated in FIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 104A and 104B illustrate top-down isometric views of the merchandise system illustrated in FIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 105A through 105E illustrate isometric views of the example merchandise system illustrated in FIG. 102 in operation with a product in accordance one or more aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 106A through 106E illustrate isometric views of the example merchandise system illustrated in FIG. 102 connecting and in operation with multiple merchandise systems in accordance one or more aspects of the present invention.
- the present invention relates to the securement, management, and distribution of products in settings such as a retail setting and includes numerous embodiments.
- One embodiment involves a shelf management and display system that resides either on a standard or existing “dealer” shelf typically found in a retail store or on a shelf designed with certain advantages in securing products and deterring theft.
- the embodiment may include uprights of a pre-existing shelving system or may be a stand alone unit.
- the display system includes front-facing systems, which force product to the front of a shelf. Such systems may use various methods, such as gravity, friction, magnetism, or spring-urged pushers or paddles to bring product to the front of a shelf near the aisle.
- a shelf management and display system 100 includes vertical uprights 102 and product shelves 104 removably mounted to the uprights.
- the shelves 104 may be mounted at various positions along the uprights 102 depending on the desired positioning and spacing of the shelves 104 .
- the shelves 104 may be moved or relocated to different positions along the uprights 102 as necessary.
- the shelves 104 may be pull-out shelves that pull away from the uprights 102 like drawers. As illustrated by FIG.
- the shelf 104 may incorporate a locking device 117 which involves cooperating catches that contact each other in the locked position and substantially release this contact in the unlocked position and that when released will permit the shelf 104 to pull-out and away from the uprights.
- the shelves or uprights may involve other locking devices, such as magnets, latches, notches, binders, tension or the like. Once pulled away, the store personnel can restock the shelf with product and then slide the shelf 104 back to its original position and relock the shelf.
- a back wall 106 may be mounted to the uprights 102 through known mounting techniques to aid in containing the products and to prevent access to the products from the back of the display system 100 .
- a lock box 108 may be mounted to the uprights 102 also through known mounting techniques. The lock box 108 may be used for storing and locking additional product and shelving components for quick retrieval by the store personnel. The lock box 108 may be positioned at any position on the uprights 102 , including the depicted positioning at or near the top of the display system 100 . In an alternative embodiment, the lock box 108 may be secured to a shelf 104 as opposed to the uprights 102 . With either mounting location, the additional product and shelving components are located at the display system 100 and can therefore be readily retrieved by store personnel.
- An exemplary embodiment of the invention may include a series of walls or dividers 110 that are placed between product rows, lanes or facings, and at the ends of the facings, to deter product “sweeping” by a thief. These walls 110 are sometimes referred to as “product dividers.” As used herein, the terms “vertical walls,” “product dividers” and “dividers” are meant to include any wall (including vertical and non-vertical), divider, barrier, or separator that may be used between product rows, lanes or facings.
- the product dividers 110 when positioned in a spaced-apart manner on the display system 100 , form product lanes 112 for locating and separating product to be merchandised.
- the product dividers 110 or side walls also are positioned at the sides of the product facing to prevent access to the product from the side of the display system 100 .
- these dividers or side walls may include telescoping features that permit them to extend vertically or horizontally to provide additional product securement.
- these dividers or side walls may be used in numerous applications as the size and extent of these can be adjusted to fit most shelves, shelving or display systems, or applications.
- a pusher 126 can be used to urge product forward.
- This pusher can incorporate a coil spring to assist in urging product forward.
- the divider 110 in some embodiments can include a base or floor. In some embodiments this floor includes a pusher track 128 .
- FIG. 6 shows the floor on one side of the divider wall.
- a second floor can be on the opposite side of the divider wall. With floors on both sides of the vertical divider wall, product can rest on these floors. In one such embodiment, a product can rest on one floor of one divider and a second floor of a second divider.
- the product dividers 110 define a height, shape and configuration that deter the removal of product over the product dividers 110 .
- the dividers 110 extend in a vertical or non-vertical manner between the shelves 104 and from the front of the shelf 104 to the back wall 106 .
- the dividers 110 have a generally rectangular shape; however, other shapes and configurations of the dividers, such as non-rectangular, oval, repeating patterns or the like, may be used with the invention.
- the front edge 114 of the product dividers 110 may extend vertically between the shelves 104 , or may extend non-vertically to make the products more accessible to the consumer and easier to remove from the shelf.
- the divider 110 defines a front edge 111 that includes a front edge portion 113 protruding outward from the front edge 111 , as shown in FIG. 5 .
- the protruding portion of the front edge will assist in holding the retaining wall or tab 122 in position to prevent slidable movement of the retaining wall or tab 122 , as described below.
- the product dividers 110 may be mounted to the display system 100 using numerous techniques. As an example, the dividers 110 may be inserted into tracks formed in the shelf 104 or tracks formed in a base that attaches to the shelf 104 . Similarly, the dividers 110 may be formed integral or as a unitary unit with a base that is mounted to the shelf. Also, the dividers 110 may be mounted to a rail, channel, or groove as understood by those skilled in the art. The dividers 110 should be sufficiently rigid to retain the product within the product lanes. Examples of dividers that may be used with invention are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,041,720 to Hardy, U.S. Pat. No. 4,830,201 to Breslow, and International Application No.
- the dividers 110 may have a step down or decline near its rear edge, or a decrease in wall height, to allow the wall 110 to be lifted and disengaged from the rail on which it is mounted. With this configuration, the dividers 110 may be moved laterally without interfering with the shelf above it.
- the vertical wall or divider 110 has a step down beginning approximately 2 ⁇ 3 of the wall length from its front edge.
- a shelf it may be desired to provide enhanced security for items on only a portion of a shelf. These items may be located in the center of the shelf or on a side of the shelf. Security features such as those referenced herein can be added to only a portion of the shelf, while the remainder of the shelf contains fewer or none of the security features. Where high security items are placed in the center of a shelf, these items can be segregated from the remainder of the shelf through the use of walls. These walls can provide the side barriers for the high security portion of the shelf. These walls can be made of strong construction, such as metal, and can extend from the floor of a shelf to a distance fairly near the top of the shelf. These walls also can be attached to the shelf as well as the other security features to limit the possibility of the walls being bent, removed or otherwise thwarted and to assist in limiting access to the items being merchandised on the shelf.
- walls 340 and 350 are used to segregate a shelf into a higher security area and a lower security area.
- Walls 340 and 350 can be made from steel and can extend from at or near the floor of the shelf to an area at or near the ceiling of the shelf.
- the walls also can be adjustable.
- the walls can be comprised of a top section 344 and a bottom section 346 . As shown in FIG. 31 , these two sections can overlap to provide a continuous barrier.
- the top section 344 of wall 340 and the bottom section 346 of wall 340 can include apertures that align the two walls.
- a fastener 348 such as a screw, bolt, pin, rod or other fastener can be used to join the two walls at a particular height.
- the walls also can comprise a floor 342 which includes apertures and can be connected to the floor of the shelf through a fastener 349 such as a screw, bolt, pin, rod or other fastener.
- the walls 340 and 350 may be in the form of an adjustable wall 702 that is slidably movable and repositionable.
- the wall 702 defines one or more elongated channels or slots 704 that permit movement of the wall 702 and adjustment of the location of the wall 702 to a desired position.
- the channels 704 may be vertically and horizontally oriented on the adjustable wall 702 .
- the wall 702 may be moved and positioned, as desired, and secured to a lower wall portion 706 through the use of fasteners 708 , such as screws, bolts, pins, rods or or the like.
- the lower wall portion 706 may include numerous holes 709 for receiving the fasteners 708 and may include a floor 710 which may include a plurality of holes 711 for mounting the floor 710 to the to the floor of the shelf as described above.
- a tool 714 such as a hex key, wrench, screw driver, or the like, may be mounted to the lower wall portion 706 to be used by a user to make the desired adjustments of the location of the wall 702 .
- the elongated channels 704 provide for numerous mounting positions of the wall 702 relative to the lower wall portion 706 .
- the wall 702 is fastened to the lower wall portion 706 such that the fasteners 708 are located at positions 716 a and 716 b in the elongated channel 704 .
- the wall 702 will be in an unextended position.
- the wall 702 may be positioned and the fasteners 708 may be located at positions 716 c and 716 d. In this position, the wall 702 will be in an extended position such that the wall 702 extends upward relative to the lower wall portion 706 and away from the lower wall portion.
- the wall 702 may serve as an additional barrier to inhibit access to the shelf and thereby further secure the products on the shelf.
- the wall 702 may be positioned and the fasteners 708 may be located at positions 716 b and 716 e. In this position, the wall 702 will be in an extended position such that the wall 702 extends away from the lower wall portion and will be at the same height as the lower wall portion. It should be readily apparent that numerous other positions of the wall 702 relative to the shelf are possible depending on the desired level of security and the configuration of the shelf, and the tool 714 provides convenience and ease of adjustment of the wall 702 .
- the elongated channel may define numerous other configurations that still permit movement and adjustment of the wall 702 relative to the lower portion.
- the system illustrated by FIGS. 74-78 may further be configured and mounted on either or both ends of the shelf, and if desired, to the front or rear of the shelf.
- the wall may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic.
- a clip or clip member 320 or 360 may be used to further secure the wall 340 , 350 to the shelf 104 and in particular the walls that separate secure products from non-secure products.
- the clip 320 , 360 also can be used to secure divider 110 to a shelf 104 (embodiment not shown).
- the clip 320 , 360 may be used to strengthen the wall 340 , 350 to prevent the bending or moving of the wall.
- the wall 340 , 350 may be made of a thinner, less costly material because the clip 320 , 360 will prevent potential bending or twisting of the wall to access the product on the shelf.
- the walls 140 , 150 also are known as side walls.
- the clip 320 , 360 is configured at one end to engage a hinge rail 322 , which is used to hinge the barrier 140 , discussed below, to the shelf 104 .
- the hinge rail 322 is mounted to a shelf.
- the clip 320 , 360 mounts to the shelf through its interaction with hinge rail 322 .
- the clip 320 , 360 is further configured at an opposite end to engage the wall 340 , 350 .
- the clip 320 includes a blade portion 324 that is configured to engage with the hinge rail 322 and at any of the multiple positions along the hinge rail 322 , thus providing flexibility in the placement of the clip 320 .
- the blade portion 324 may take on numerous shapes and configuration and may be connected to or joined with a clip body 328 .
- the clip body 328 is further connected to or joined with opposing wall mounting members 330 .
- the wall mounting members 330 are configured to be positioned on opposing sides of a wall 340 with the wall passing between the mounting members 330 .
- the wall mounting members 330 further define aligned holes 332 for receiving a mounting fastener 334 that may be used to secure the mounting members 330 to the wall 340 , as depicted by FIG. 27 .
- the aligned holes 332 may be thru holes or threaded holes. As can be appreciated, any type of fastener or securement technique may be used to secure the clip 320 to the wall 340 .
- a clip 360 can be used to further secure the wall 340 , 350 to the shelf 104 .
- the hinge rail ceases (not shown).
- Clip 360 includes a blade portion 362 that extends in only one direction from the clip body 364 .
- the blade portion 362 is configured to engage the hinge rail 322 .
- the blade portion engages only a single hinge piece or knuckle of the hinge rail.
- a single hinge piece or knuckle is designated by 323 .
- the blade portion 362 includes a first blade portion 363 and a second portion 366 that can be at an angle to first portion 363 .
- the second portion 366 can be configured to interact with the side 324 of knuckle 323 .
- the blade 362 may take on numerous shapes and configuration and may be connected to or joined with a clip body 364 .
- the clip body 364 is further connected to or joined with opposing wall mounting members 368 .
- the wall mounting members 368 are configured to be positioned on opposing sides of a wall 350 with the wall passing between the mounting members 368 .
- the wall mounting members 368 further define aligned holes 370 for receiving a mounting fastener (not shown) that may be used to secure the mounting members 368 to the wall 350 .
- the aligned holes 370 may be thru holes or threaded holes. As can be appreciated, any type of fastener or securement technique may be used to secure the clip 360 to the wall 340 or 350 .
- a front retaining wall 116 may be positioned along the front edge of the shelf 104 .
- the front retaining wall 116 can serve as a “fence” to restrain the product in the product lanes 112 and assist in preventing the product from falling off the front of the shelf 104 .
- the retaining wall 116 stops the forward movement of product that is caused by the urging of the pushers, described below.
- the retaining wall 116 may be mounted to a channel or rail 118 that extends along the front edge 119 of the shelf 104 .
- the channel or rail 118 may be mounted to existing holes in a standard dealer shelf, or secured by any other known manner to the shelf 104 .
- the retaining wall 116 may be mounted to or on the channel or rail 118 .
- the front retaining wall 116 may be made of a clear plastic to permit visualization of the product on the shelf and provide a more aesthetically pleasing organization to the merchandised product.
- the front retaining wall 116 can also be created from opaque or semi-transparent material, or from wire, and can be adaptable to display graphics.
- the front retaining wall 116 can have a variety of configurations, such as rectangular, oblong, repeating patterns or the like.
- the front retaining wall 116 may also include holes or openings 120 extending therethrough that are spaced along the wall 116 .
- the holes 120 permit the consumer and store personnel to push the product back and away from the retaining wall 116 for ease of insertion and removal of the product.
- the retaining wall 116 can have a height that permits the removal of a single product at a time or, depending on the desired level of security, a couple of products or a few products at a time. In other words, the height of the retaining wall 116 can permit limited access to and removal of product from the display system 100 . Stated another way, the retaining wall 116 is not so tall as to prohibit any access to the product, but is sized to allow the consumer or store personnel to access and lift a limited number of product over the retaining wall 116 at one time. This limited removal of products is accomplished through the use of the retaining wall 116 and the close proximity of the shelf 104 positioned above the product.
- the shelf 104 located above the product will be positioned in close proximity to the top edge of the product, or the top edge of the product divider 110 , whichever is taller.
- the shelf 104 located above the product, the product dividers 110 , and the retaining wall 116 will form an opening or window 131 through which only a single, two, or possibly a few, product(s) can be removed at one time or in a single motion. This configuration also deters “sweeping” of product from the shelf 104 .
- the size of the window 131 can be adjusted by adjusting the location of the shelf 104 above the product, the dividers 110 , and/or the retaining wall 116 , or through the use of a second retaining wall 122 , barrier 130 , and/or barrier 140 , described below.
- This window 131 adjustment permits flexibility with the system and allows the store to set the window 131 size depending on the product size and how many products they want to permit consumers to remove at a time.
- a second retaining wall 122 may be positioned behind or possibly in front of the retaining wall 116 to serve as a retainer for the product.
- the second retaining wall 122 may be referred to as a “tab” and may include any retaining structure or “fence” that can be selectively configured or mounted to the shelves 104 to provide selective theft prevention of specific products, such as high theft items. Consequently, the second retaining wall or tab 122 may have many configurations, shapes and designs, and may be used in front of individual rows of product or groups of rows of product.
- the second retaining wall or tab 122 may be mounted to or on a second channel or rail 124 that extends parallel with the channel or rail 118 .
- the retaining wall or tab 122 may be slidable relative to the shelf 104 or rail 124 , or may be fixed relative to the shelf 104 or rail 124 .
- the tab 122 can be positioned between adjacent dividers 110 and held in position between the dividers 110 . In other words, the tab 122 may not be permitted much slidable movement in or on the channel or rail 124 because the dividers 110 will hinder such slidable movement.
- the dividers 110 contain a portion that serves as a stop to prevent the tab or first retaining wall from moving laterally. Such configuration further prevents theft of the product as potential thieves will not be permitted to simply slide the tab 122 to the side and remove numerous products at a time.
- the second retaining wall or tab 122 will have a height that permits access to and removal of a limited number of product. If desired, the tab 122 may have a height that permits removal of only one product at a time. With the use of tabs 122 , the display system 100 will have flexibility in that tabs 122 of varying height may be positioned in front of the product lanes 112 to accommodate various sized products. That is, if a row of product has a product height that is different than a product in an adjacent row, tabs 122 of varying height can be used to provide the proper level of security and access to the product.
- the tabs 122 may be sized to extend across one product lane 112 or in front of a single row of product. In an alternative embodiment, the tab 122 may be sized and shaped to extend across multiple product lanes 112 . In this embodiment, the tabs 122 could include slots or channels to permit the tabs to “straddle” the dividers 110 and thereby extend across multiple product lanes. In addition, the dividers 110 could extend through the slots or channels and thereby inhibit slidable movement of the tabs 122 .
- the second retaining wall or tab 122 may also be used in place of the retaining wall 116 .
- the front “fence” on a product facing may be the tabs 122 of varying height, length and width, or of the same dimensions.
- the channel or rail 118 may be used to mount dealer-shelf accessories, such as clip-in signage, price tag holders, and the like.
- the tab 122 also can be attached to the divider 110 or can be formed such that the tab 122 and divider 110 are an integral piece.
- a wall or partial wall structure such as tab 122 can exist at the front of the divider 110 and can extend to the left or right or to both the left and right of the divider. This wall or partial wall can be used with or without a front retaining wall 116 .
- the tabs 122 may include holes or openings 125 through the tab 122 , similar to the holes or openings 120 in the retaining wall 116 , to permit the consumer and store personnel to push the product back and away from the retaining wall 116 and tab 122 for ease of insertion and removal of the product.
- the holes or openings 126 allow product to be replaced by a consumer who removes it and decides not to purchase the product.
- the holes or openings 120 , 125 are constructed to allow finger access therethrough to push back the row of product. Once the products are pushed backward, the consumer or store personnel can replace the removed products back into the facing. It should be understood that tabs 122 also can be used that do not include the holes or openings 125 .
- the tab 122 may provide securement for an individual row of a product facing. That is, it may be desirable to provide additional theft deterrence for an individual row of product.
- the tab 122 having the desired dimensions may be positioned in front of a desired product row to provide additional securement for just that row of product.
- This embodiment will provide the stores with additional flexibility with their planograms and product facings in that individual tabs 122 of different dimensions may be placed at various locations across the facing to enhance the securement of particular products.
- retainer tabs 122 can be used on an individual facing basis for specific products. If a shelf is merchandised with product packages of variable height, the retainer wall 116 must be of a height that allows the shortest product package to be lifted over it. If a shelf 104 , barrier 130 , or barrier 140 is employed above the product, then the shelf 104 or barriers 130 , 140 must be located at a height above the product to allow the placement of the tallest product below it. This may allow a thief easy access to the taller product by being able to easily lift the taller product in quantity over the relatively short retainer wall 116 . It can be desirable, then, to increase the height of a front barrier only in front of the taller product.
- the second retaining wall or tab 122 can be of a taller height than the retaining wall 116 and can be generally taller than required for the small product packages.
- the retainer wall or tab 122 can therefore be constructed and used to limit access to the taller product and removal of several taller products at a time or in one motion, further securing product and deterring theft.
- the retainer wall or tab 122 can be constructed and used to limit access to smaller but deeper products and to limit the removal of several smaller but deeper products at a time or in one motion.
- the retainer tab 122 thus allows flexible placement of product on a shelf by the retailer and manufacturer, no matter the size, shape, and configuration of the product.
- the retaining wall 116 and tab 122 may be mounted, directly or indirectly, to the shelf 104 using numerous techniques.
- the retaining wall 116 and tab 122 may be slidably mounted to or receivable in the channels or rails 118 , 124 , which are secured to the front edge of the shelf through fasteners, adhesives, friction, tension, magnetism, or other restraining techniques and methods.
- the retaining wall 116 and tab 122 may also be directly mounted or connected to the shelf 104 also through the use of fasteners, adhesives, friction, tension, magnetism, or other restraining techniques and methods.
- the retaining wall 116 and tab 122 may be fixed to the shelf 104 or removably mounted to the shelf 104 to permit additional flexibility in the design and level of security of the system.
- Pushers 126 may be placed behind product between the back wall 106 and the front edge of the shelf 104 to push the product forward so that it may be removed from the front of the shelf.
- the retaining wall 116 and tabs 122 if used, in some embodiments can stop the forward movement of product that is caused by the urging of the pushers.
- Known pushers may be used with the invention, including the pushers and pusher systems described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,041,720 to Hardy, U.S. Pat. No. 4,830,201 to Breslow, and International Application No. PCT/US02/15760 and corresponding International Publication No. WO 02/091885 A1 to Hardy, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the pushers 126 may be spring-urged pushers that move along a track 128 to push product toward the front edge of the shelf 104 , as shown in FIG. 6 .
- Track 128 can form a floor on one side of the divider.
- a second floor, with or without a track, can be located on the other side of the divider.
- the pushers 126 may have a pusher face or paddle 129 that may extend laterally to increase the pushing surface of the pusher to thereby pusher wider product more effectively.
- the pusher 126 may have an extendable pusher face to push either narrow product or wide product.
- the pusher face or paddle 129 may be extendable from a retracted position to one of several extended positions.
- the extended pusher face locates the product pushing surface behind the center or near the center of the wider product, thereby greatly enhancing the pushing leverage on the wider product.
- Numerous other types of pushers and pusher faces may be used with the invention, including the systems and pushers described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/772,134 to Hardy, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- the pushers 126 may be stand-alone units that are mountable to the shelf 104 using any known technique, including the channel mounting technique depicted in the figures. That is, in one embodiment, the pusher 126 may be mounted to a front rail or channel 133 , as shown in FIG. 6 , and may be slidably adjustable within or on that rail or channel. Alternatively, the pushers 126 may be used in conjunction with dividers 110 and may be operatively mounted to the dividers 110 , as disclosed in the above referenced patents and application, or as known in the art.
- the pushers 126 may incorporate spring mechanisms, such as coil springs, that include an indicia strip.
- the indicia strip is provided on spring mechanism and contains data relating to the position of the pusher 126 .
- a sensor assembly may scan the indicia strip and transmit data representative of the product and the position of the pusher on the display system to a store computer or some other suitable device, such as a portable computer or controller.
- the transmitted data can be used to determine inventory levels and can be done so in real time.
- the amount of product removed from a particular location in the store can be determined. This information can be used to determine the effectiveness of product placement and promotional displays, particularly when a product can be obtained from various places within the retail store.
- the alarm can be used to alert security personnel to the fact that too much product has been removed from the shelf at one time and thus a potential theft has occurred.
- the location of the incident can also be used to alert a security camera so as to focus the camera in the direction of the potential theft, as discussed below.
- numerous types of sensors and detection techniques may be used to monitor the relative position and movement of the pusher 126 .
- the indicia strip may contain numerous types of patterns that can be optically readable or can be read using several different types of detection methods, such as passive variable capacitance, inductance, resistance, magnetics, or active signal detection.
- the merchandised product may be urged toward the front of the shelf 104 through other techniques, including friction, gravity and/or magnetism.
- these techniques may be used with the display system 100 and the teachings of the present invention.
- These techniques may be used with or without dividers 110 , depending on the desired application.
- the shelf is not completely horizontal but has an incline or decline from back to front.
- the merchandised product may be urged toward the front of the shelf 104 through vibration or quick movements that orient products in a particular direction on the shelf 104 . Vibration can cause products to move forward on the shelf 104 and prevent them from moving backward so that the product is front facing. This vibration may be applied through mechanical, electrical or other structures or designs.
- directed vibration moves product toward the front of the shelf.
- the directed vibration causes product to move in particular directions or in one direction and not to move in other directions.
- this vibration which is instituted through the shelf 104 , upright 102 , floor, wall, ceiling or other structure, or through a vibrative pulse or signal traveling through the air, the product moves in a particular direction, such as frontward.
- vibration technique for urging product forward on the shelf 104 In another embodiment of the vibration technique for urging product forward on the shelf 104 , general undirected vibration is applied to the system. This vibration may be applied through the shelf 104 , upright 102 , floor, wall, ceiling, other structure or through vibration or a signal traveling through the air. Directors, such as small toggles, ridges, flanges, fingers, or the like, cause product to move in a particular direction depending on their configuration, shape, and orientation. These directors can channel the energy from unspecific vibration and force product in a particular direction, such as frontward. The directors can be placed on the shelf 104 , divider 110 , floors, walls or ceilings of the system and can be incorporated into the product itself.
- the floor may be a flat surface panel operatively coupled to a motion providing device.
- product is placed on the flat surface panel and a combination of gravity and friction hold the product in place on the flat surface panel.
- the motion providing device then slowly moves the flat surface panel toward the retaining wall 116 located at the front of the shelf 104 .
- the motion providing device quickly, in a jerking motion, pulls the flat surface panel in the opposite direction or, in other words, toward the back of the shelf.
- a horizontal barrier 130 may be included above the product packages and secured to the front edge of the shelf 104 positioned above the product.
- the barrier 130 may be fixed to the front edge of the shelf 104 or may be fixed to uprights 102 .
- the barrier 130 further deters unobstructed access to the product in the product facing by reducing the area, window or opening through which product could be removed from the shelf.
- the barrier 130 may be constructed separate from the shelf or may be integral with the shelf.
- the barrier 130 may span one row of product on a facing, or may span multiple rows of product, depending on the desired level of security.
- the barrier 130 may comprise another shelf 104 positioned just above the product.
- the shelf 104 above the product is positioned in close proximity to the product.
- the barrier 130 restricts access from the front of the shelf 104 to only one or a few products positioned behind the front product in a facing row to permit the removal of only a few products from a shelf, or a product pusher, at one time or in one motion.
- the retaining walls 116 and tabs 122 may be used conjunctively with the barrier 130 to prevent product from being easily removed from the shelf 104 .
- the present invention contemplates the use of one, two or multiple barriers or walls to prevent several products from being removed from the shelf at a time or in one motion.
- the barrier 130 may be made of various materials and may be secured to the front of the shelf 104 through any known technique.
- a further embodiment of the invention incorporates a barrier 140 that spans across one or two, some, all or the majority of the top of the product on a shelf 104 .
- the barrier 140 functions similar to a door in that it may be hinged or movably mounted to the edge of the shelf 104 , or the barrier 130 , just above the product to be protected.
- the term “barrier” is meant to include any structure that will prevent, inhibit or obstruct access to the product on the shelf 104 .
- the barrier can embody numerous shapes and configurations.
- the barrier 140 may be mounted to the shelf 104 using existing mounting holes on the shelf.
- the barrier 140 also may be mounted on the front edge of a front rail from the shelf above it.
- the front edge of the shelf can have hooks or “j” shapes on its underside.
- the barrier 140 can have apertures which fit within the hooks or “j” shapes.
- the barrier 140 defines a bottom lip or edge that may meet or overlap the top edge of the retaining wall 116 or tab 122 . Such meeting or overlap further closes off access to the product except with deliberate action.
- the barrier 140 may include a handle 202 to assist in moving the barrier 140 from a closed position to an open position, and vice versa.
- the handle may be molded with the barrier 140 along the edge of the barrier as exemplified by FIG. 13 , or the handle may be a separate component attached, mounted, secured, or adhered to the barrier 140 using any known technique.
- the barrier 140 may be configured with a reinforcing rim that extends along the edge of the barrier 140 .
- the reinforcing rim provides additional structural integrity and rigidity to the barrier 140 .
- the reinforcing rim may also be equipped or configured with a handle. If the barrier 140 is configured with a locking mechanism as described herein the reinforcing rim will assist in preventing a potential thief from bending or breaking the barrier 140 and thus giving the thief access to the product that is intended to be locked and secured on the shelf.
- a hole or opening 204 may be located in the barrier 140 through which may be mounted a cable lock or similar locking mechanism, as discussed below.
- the product display system includes inverted features.
- the aspects of the invention that are placed on a floor or a shelf and extend upward can be placed on a ceiling or extend downward, and vice versa.
- the barrier 140 and retaining wall 116 , the dividers 110 , and tabs 122 may be inverted. It is contemplated that in some embodiments the retaining wall 116 , the dividers 110 , and/or tabs 122 may be configured above the barrier 140 which would extend upwardly from the shelf 104 .
- the retaining wall 116 , the dividers 110 and/or tabs 122 may be placed on the underside of the shelf above the product and extend downward.
- Pushers 126 and/or tracks 128 can be secured to the underside of a shelf such that the pushers extend downward and the pusher springs are located near or behind the portion of the pusher that is near the underside of the shelf.
- the barrier 140 to access product behind the barrier 140 , the barrier 140 must be moved or lifted, which requires a deliberate movement and the use of one hand to hold the barrier 140 in place. While the barrier 140 is lifted or moved, the product can be removed. A consumer or store personnel who uses one hand to hold the barrier 140 in place, will need to use the other hand to remove product from the display system 100 .
- This embodiment is constructed to inhibit the ability of a consumer to access product with two hands at the same time. While product is accessible to the consumer or store personnel, the removal of large amounts of product in a short period of time is deterred.
- the barrier 140 can be created from a clear, opaque or semi-transparent material and may be hinged or slidable in a variety of common ways.
- an adjustable and removable barrier extension 206 may be configured with the barrier 140 .
- the barrier extension 206 may be used to provide additional product security by creating a larger barrier to prevent or limit access to the product on the shelf.
- the barrier extension 206 may be selectively mounted to the barrier 140 through the use of mounting holes 208 and fasteners 210 .
- mounting holes 208 can be located on either the barrier 140 or the barrier extension 206 or both. These mounting holes can be aligned vertically or non-vertically.
- the several mounting holes 208 permit the barrier extension 206 to be adjusted relative to the barrier 140 to permit the barrier extension 206 to extend a desired distance, depending on the application, the desired level of security, or the placement of the shelves.
- Other techniques for mounting or attaching the barrier extension 206 to the barrier 140 are possible with the invention, including techniques using other types of fasteners or adhesives.
- the barrier extension 206 can define numerous shapes and configurations depending on the desired application and level of product securement.
- the barrier extension 206 can be configured to extend across one row of product, one facing, or more than one row or facing.
- the barrier extension 206 may also be made of a clear, transparent, or semi-transparent material to permit or prevent the product on the shelf to be visible to a consumer or stock person.
- the barrier extension 206 may also include a handle similar to the handle 202 described above.
- the barrier extension 206 may include a reinforcing rim 212 that provides additional structural integrity and rigidity to the barrier extension 206 to further provide additional product security.
- the reinforcing rim 212 may also be equipped or configured with a handle 214 . If the barrier extension 206 is configured with a locking mechanism as described herein, or configured to be in a locked position, the reinforcing rim 212 will assist in preventing a potential thief from bending or breaking the barrier extension 206 and thus giving the thief access to the product that is intended to be locked and secured on the shelf.
- a locking mechanism may be further added to the barrier 140 to further hinder or prevent access to the product on the shelf.
- a cylinder lock 200 may be used to secure and lock the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 in a closed position to prevent access to the product.
- the lock 200 may be mounted to the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 , through a opening or hole 216 ( FIG. 14 ), and may be configured to mount through the openings 120 in the retaining wall 116 .
- the lock 200 may engage an arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 configured in or formed with the retaining wall 116 .
- the arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 will further secure the lock 200 to the retaining wall 116 by permitting the locking tab of the cylindrical lock 200 to more securely seat on, or be held in place relative to, the retaining wall 116 .
- a lock such as lock 200
- a consumer or store personnel will need to use a key, special tool, or access card to open the lock prior to moving or lifting the barrier 140 .
- the lock 200 may engage an arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 configured in or formed with the retaining wall 116 .
- the arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 will further secure the lock 200 to the retaining wall 116 by permitting the locking tab of the cylindrical lock 200 to more securely seat on, or be held in place relative to, the retaining wall 116 .
- a lock such as lock 200
- a consumer or store personnel will need to use a key, special tool, or access card to open the lock prior to moving or lifting the barrier 140 .
- a lock 280 may be a key-locked rotating oval-shaped lock.
- the lock 280 is secured to the retaining wall 116 through a hole 282 formed in the retaining wall 116 . More specifically, and referring to FIG. 20 , the lock 280 includes an anchoring bolt that defines a bolt head 284 . The bolt head 284 and washer, if used, will secure the lock 280 to the retaining wall 116 . As can be seen in FIG. 20 , numerous holes 282 may be positioned along the retaining wall 116 to provide flexibility in the location and placement of the lock 280 , as well as providing for the use of numerous locks 280 .
- the lock 280 also can include flanges 290 , 292 that interact with retaining wall 116 .
- the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 if used, defines an oval-shaped opening 286 . Similar to the flexibility provided by the numerous holes 282 , numerous openings 286 may be placed along the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 to provide the same flexibility. As shown in FIG. 18 , when the lock 280 is in a locked position, the opening 286 prevents the lock 280 from passing through the opening 286 . As illustrated by FIG. 19 , when the lock 280 is moved to an unlocked position through the use of a key 288 , the oval-shaped lock 280 will to pass through the oval-shaped opening 286 thus permitting the opening of the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 .
- the lock 280 can, but need not, interact with the channels or rails 118 , 124 and can leave these channels or rails substantially free to receive other objects such as a retaining wall or tab 122 .
- the invention is not limited to the depicted oval-shape lock 280 and opening 286 as well as the illustrated placement of the lock and opening; rather, many various shaped keyed or keyless locks may be used with similarly shaped openings formed in the barrier or barrier extension and placed in numerous locations and still achieve the benefits of the invention.
- FIGS. 21-24 depict an additional locking mechanism.
- a lock plate 302 can extend through an opening or slot 304 formed in the retaining wall 116 and through an opening 306 formed in the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 .
- the lock plate 302 is configured to receive the padlock 300 .
- One or more of the openings or slots 304 may be formed in the retaining wall 116 at various positions along the retaining wall including the depicted positions between the holes or openings 120 in the retaining wall 116 .
- the openings or slots 304 are configured to receive the lock plate 302 and to secure the lock plate 302 onto the retaining wall 116 , as described below. While the openings or slots 304 are depicted as vertical slots, other shapes and configurations of the openings or slots 304 are possible with the invention.
- Padlock 300 may be used to secure and lock the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 in a closed position to prevent access to the product.
- the padlock 300 may be any known keyed or keyless padlock and may be mounted to the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 through the use of a movable lock plate 302 .
- one or more lock plates 302 may be used to secure and lock the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 in a closed position to prevent access to the product.
- the lock plates 302 are movable in that they can be positioned within any of the openings or slots 304 along the retaining wall 116 . Being movable also permits the barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 to be made in various widths to protect only those products on the shelf that must be protected.
- the lock plate 302 need not interact with the channels or rails 118 , 124 and can leave these channels or rails substantially free to receive other objects such as a retaining wall or tab 122 .
- the lock plate 302 may be made of any suitable metal or plastic material and may define a nose 310 that will extend through the retaining wall 116 and barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 , if used.
- the nose 310 further defines an opening or hole 312 for receiving the padlock 300 , as illustrated by FIG. 21 .
- the nose 310 also defines a notch or cut-away 314 that, when assembled, will seat on the bottom edge of the opening or slot 304 , as shown in FIG. 24 . Once in this position, the notch or cut-away 314 will prevent the lock plate 302 from being slid or pushed back out of the slot 304 and behind the retaining wall 116 .
- the nose 310 is connected to or formed with a back plate 316 .
- the back plate 316 includes legs or retaining members 318 that, when assembled, will be positioned behind the retaining wall 116 and assist in holding the lock plate 302 on the retaining wall 116 .
- the back plate 316 and retaining members 318 may take on numerous configurations that aid in holding the lock plate 302 to the retaining wall 116 .
- the lock plate 302 may be configured to not only extend through the retaining wall 116 and barrier 140 or barrier extension 206 , it may also extend through and be used with the tab 122 .
- any known locking mechanism can be used with the invention, including a cable lock that may be mounted with the hole 204 ( FIG. 13 ), and any known key, special tool, access card, electronic, magnetic or wireless means (for keyless locking mechanisms) can be used to open the locking mechanism.
- an exemplary embodiment of the invention incorporates a system that causes an alert to store or security personnel that a potential theft situation exists.
- lifting or moving the barrier 140 activates a mechanical or electronic alert device 142 , generally depicted in the figures, that provides a signal, such as an audible, inaudible, infrared, radio-frequency, cellular, ultrasonic or electronic signal (including digital and analog signals), or a combination of these signals.
- This alert signal may be a sound, tone or voice annunciation that alerts store or security personnel that the barrier 140 has been opened or has been opened for an unusually long period of time and potentially represents a theft situation.
- the alert device 142 also may send an electronic or other signal to play a voice message via the store paging system, to activate a local or remote strobe or annunciator light, or to send a signal to a receiver, such as a store computer, a pager, cellular device, or other portable device carried by store or security personnel.
- the alert device 142 may also activate a security video camera to monitor the particular area or vicinity, or activate a monitor that is placed in the area or vicinity which would show the camera image to the consumers and potential thief, or transmit the camera image to security or store management via a web connection, cellular telephone, personal data assistant, or any other signal receiving device.
- the alert device 142 also may activate an advertisement, informational announcement or other statement or display that is provided through voice, video or video and voice.
- This advertisement, announcement or statement can be directed to the particular product or product type associated with product behind the barrier that activates the alert device.
- the alert device can be located such that barriers of a width of no more than one product facing will activate the alert device when lifted.
- the term “alert device” is meant to include any device or component that may provide an alert, warning and/or signal concerning a condition, situation, and/or circumstance.
- the alert device 142 may be hard-wired to the store's security system or may be a wireless system.
- Wireless systems if used, provide increased flexibility in installation and can be readily installed in existing shelves without the need to install wires for either power or communication.
- the use of a wireless system allows for the gradual installation of a system. For example, items of high value (and therefore suffering from an increased likelihood of being stolen) or items that tend to have significant variations in customer demand can be monitored first.
- the alert signal may be sent to not only the store's security system or computer, but also any portable device or receiver, such as a controller, personal data assistant, pager or cellular telephone that may be carried by store personnel or security.
- the store's computer can process further the alert signal to determine whether a theft situation exists and can generate reports which can be analyzed to fine tune product placement, placement of cameras, alert devices, sensors, and so forth, as well as fine tune the delays and actions initiated by potential theft situations.
- the store's computer can be configured with the network server and can be accessible remotely through the world-wide web or other network, and can be controlled remotely through the world-wide web or other network.
- the alert device 142 is positioned on the shelf 104 , either underneath, as depicted in FIG. 8 , or on top of the shelf. Existing mounting holes on the standard dealer shelf may be used to secure the alert device to the shelf.
- the alert device 142 may be positioned near to or adjacent to the barrier 140 .
- the alert device 142 may be operatively connected to the barrier 140 through numerous techniques.
- the alert device 142 includes a switch 144 , such as a push-button switch, that will activate when the barrier 140 is moved or opened. That is, as the barrier 140 moves and comes in contact with the switch 144 , either directly or through the use of an activator plate 145 , the switch 144 is activated. Alternatively, in a closed-barrier position, the switch 144 is pressed, as the barrier 140 moves to an open position the barrier 140 moves away from the switch 144 , thereby releasing the switch 144 and thus activating the alert device 142 .
- a switch 144 such as a push-button switch
- the alert device 142 may be operatively connected or coupled to the barrier to detect movement of the barrier through other methods or techniques.
- a motion sensor or similar sensory devices such as a light-emitting diode sensor assembly, may be used to detect movement of the barrier and communicate that information to the alert device 142 .
- the sensor may be mounted in a variety of locations including on the barrier itself or next to the barrier to detect barrier movement.
- a magnetic switch may be incorporated to detect movement of the barrier.
- the alert device 142 may include sensory components and time-delay features that will calculate how long the barrier 140 has been moved or opened. Upon reaching a predetermined time period, in other words, as the barrier 140 has been moved or opened for a certain duration, the alert device 142 will send a signal, such as the above-mentioned signals, to alert the store personnel, security and/or the consumer that the barrier 140 has been opened or moved for a long period of time, thereby indicating a potential theft situation. In an exemplary embodiment, upon the passing of the predetermined time period, the alert device 142 may send an audio alert signal, including a signal different from a previous audio alert signal, that would draw attention to the vicinity. The alert device 142 can therefore be designed to provide its alert for a fixed period of time before becoming silent.
- the audio alert signal is adjustable to provide a variety of alert tones of varying frequencies, or to announce that the barrier 140 has been opened or moved for too long and that the consumer needs to close the barrier 140 , or to send a silent alarm to the store and/or security personnel.
- Different signals or frequencies can be used as the length of time in which the barrier has been opened or moved increases.
- Numerous combinations of alert signals are possible with the alert device 142 depending on the desired level of security.
- the alert signal is adjustable and numerous combinations of signals may be used to provide the desired signal level and thus security level, yet avoid turning away legitimate consumers from selecting and purchasing the product. That is, for example, the alert device 142 can be programmed to provide an alert signal that will draw the attention of surrounding shoppers or store/security personnel, yet short enough to limit aggravation of the legitimate consumers or stock person.
- a two-tiered response could be implemented. For example, if the barrier 140 is moved, a signal could be transmitted directly to the security camera, or via the store computer or both. In addition, an inaudible notification could be provided directly to security personnel. If the barrier 140 remains open or moved for a set period of time, more clearly indicating a potential theft, an additional audible alarm and flashing lights could also be activated, or any other alarm. Thus, the response could be configured to more carefully match the situation.
- a security video camera 260 may be placed in the vicinity of product that are high risk theft items, or other product of concern.
- a monitor 262 also may be placed in the vicinity of the high risk product. The monitor 262 may be used to show the security camera image to consumers and any potential thief. Thus, a consumer or potential thief that removes product from the shelf 104 of the display system 100 may realize that their actions are being watched by a camera and potentially recorded.
- the position of the potential theft relative to the security camera 260 would be beneficial to provide an instruction to the security camera to focus on a particular position.
- This positional information could be generated by a number of methods, including providing a store computer with the security camera coordinate system for the security camera.
- the location of the alert device 142 relative to the security camera could be determined during setup and during a potential theft situation; the location of the alert device 142 could be used to direct the focus of the security camera.
- the security camera could be configured to focus in several positions, such as three points along an aisle, and the store computer could indicate which position was the most appropriate for the particular situation.
- One skilled in the art will appreciate that the described methods are illustrative because of the numerous methods of controlling the security camera that exist.
- the monitor can show video in the form of advertising or consumer information.
- the monitor 262 can switch between the advertising or consumer information and the camera image through the use of a video switch 264 .
- This switching activity can occur on a periodic basis, such as every 30 seconds, or can occur when predetermined conditions are met, such as the lifting of the barrier 140 , the removal of product, the movement of a pusher, or input from a proximity sensor that a consumer has entered or approaches the area.
- the device By playing the video segment, the device not only reduces loss, but becomes a source of revenue when advertisers are charged to place their message on the system.
- a secondary video source for the monitor on which advertising, consumer information or other content is shown can be a video player 266 such as a video cassette recorder, compact disk-video player, solid state digital video player, direct video, audio feed or other video sources.
- the switching action between the camera image and advertising or other content can be effected by a hardware timer or a small microcontroller.
- the secondary video source can contain a multitude of short video segments which are randomly or non-randomly selected by the timer or microcontroller.
- the camera 260 may be a small, stand-alone type, not connected to any part of an existing security system, or it may be any typical store security camera existing in the store's security network.
- the monitor 262 may be a small flat, color, LCD type monitor and can be placed at numerous locations on or near the shelf 104 .
- the monitor may be placed in overhead signage above the merchandised product or it can be attached to the shelf 104 edge.
- a larger monitor such as a CRT-type, plasma, LCD or projection monitor can be used.
- a preferred solid-state digital video player may comprise the secondary video source. The source may be housed in the same enclosure as the monitor or may be located remotely from the monitor.
- the shelf 104 on which the product rests may be a “pull-out” shelf.
- the “pull-out” shelf allows store associates or personnel access to the product to restock the shelf but prevents a thief from obtaining such access.
- the pull-out shelf allows easy access to all products on the shelf. This function, however, requires that the shelf not be movable by the consumer or thief and therefore the pull-out function must be protected by a key-lock, special tool, or other locking mechanism.
- the product dividers 110 may be designed to be at least equal to the height of the tallest product package on the shelf.
- the product lane or dividers may cause the barrier 140 to rise. If the height of the dividers 110 is lower than the tallest product package, pushing the shelf back in may cause the barrier 140 to catch on the product packages and make it more difficult to return to its closed position. Additionally, pulling out the shelf 104 will raise the barrier 140 which may activate an annunciator or signal generator, as explained above.
- a barrier placed on a top-most shelf 104 may include a lock-box 108 that may be used for storage of overstock product or additional display system 100 components.
- the top-most shelf 104 is a pull-out type, the shelf 104 will pull out while the horizontal barrier above it remains in place, allowing product to be easily accessed.
- the lock-box 108 may also be mounted to the vertical uprights 102 , through known mounting techniques, and may be mounted at any location on the display system 100 .
- the lock-box 108 may use any known locking mechanism that permits key or key-less entry to the lock-box 108 .
- other security components may be mounted to the lock-box 108 including the security camera, monitor, and alert device 142 , to name a few.
- a stationary shroud 180 may placed toward the top of the product display system 100 .
- the shroud 180 provides security and graphic placement, and product may be stored within it.
- the shroud 180 provides security in that it functions as a top wall or barrier preventing access to the product from a point above the product.
- the shroud 180 may mount on or to an existing shelf.
- the shroud 180 may be fixed or adjustable. With an adjustable shroud, the shroud can be positioned at numerous locations on the product display system.
- the shroud 180 can be a pull-out shroud functioning in manner similar to the exemplary pull-out shelf 104 described above.
- the shroud 180 can also serve as a shelf to hold product.
- the product display system 100 could include multiple shrouds 180 that function as shelves to hold or display product.
- the shroud can be configured to mount the barriers 130 , 140 , through numerous known mounting techniques.
- the lock box 108 having a lockable door 109 may be placed on the shroud 180 for additional product storage and graphic placement.
- the product display system 100 of the invention offers various levels of securement and theft protection. Each level described herein can be used separately and various or all levels can be used in conjunction with each other. Each level can also be added to or adapted with existing shelf systems or be provided as a stand alone system.
- the divider or retaining walls 110 provide securement.
- the front retaining wall 116 or “fence” provides securement, with or without the retaining tabs 120 .
- the barriers and access doors 130 , 140 over the top of the retaining wall 116 provides securement.
- the close positioning of the shelf 104 over the product located on the shelf below provides securement.
- the audible or other signal that is generated by the alert device 142 when the barrier 140 has been open for a set period of time provides securement.
- the security camera and video and display devices provide securement.
- Each of these separable aspects of an embodiment of the invention can be used on its own in a retail setting, or can be used in conjunction with other aspects of the embodiment.
- Each separable aspect can be added to existing shelving or display systems to effectively retrofit and add one or more levels of security to such existing systems.
- Pushers 126 , dividers 110 , and retaining walls 116 are coupled with a shelf 104 or barrier 130 , or both, above the product to provide securement to the product.
- the pushers, dividers, retaining walls, shelf, and barrier allow approximately one, two or three packages to be removed through an opening at one time from a facing of the display system.
- Second retaining walls or tabs 122 may be used to provide individual securement for specific rows of product.
- the front wall 116 and tabs 122 may also include holes or openings that extend therethrough that would require the consumer to push on the product through the holes or openings in order to remove the product from the shelf.
- a second level of securement incorporates all of the features of first level with the addition of a barrier 140 or access door.
- the consumer To access the product, the consumer must utilize two hands, one to lift or slide the barrier 140 and the other to remove the product, thus adding a second layer of deterrent to the system.
- a third level of securement builds upon the features of the first and second levels with the addition of a theft-warning notification device, such as an alert device 142 , or other signal transmission device.
- a theft-warning notification device such as an alert device 142 , or other signal transmission device.
- the alert notification or signal transmission is activated if the barrier 140 or access door is open a predetermined amount of time. This delay can be adjusted to any duration or eliminated.
- the notification provides an audible, inaudible, infrared, radio-frequency, electronic, or cellular signal that notifies consumers and/or store and security personnel that the barrier 140 has been open for a particular period of time.
- the signal transmission can send a signal to a store computer, store personnel or a security camera or monitor.
- the signal can alert the store computer or personnel that the barrier 140 or access door has been opened for a particular period of time and can activate the security camera and monitor to show the thief an image of himself or herself in front of the product. This image can be recorded. Additional alert notifications or signal transmissions can be activated as the amount of time the barrier or access door is open increases.
- An additional level of deterrence of theft by consumers or store personnel is the use of a locking mechanism on the shelf 104 to limit unauthorized personnel from pulling out the shelf.
- the system can require the use of a key or an uncommonly or commonly shaped instrument to be inserted into a concealed access slot in the front or underside of the shelf. This method is designed to require someone with specific knowledge of the shelf operation to disengage the lock.
- the barrier 140 or access door on the shelf 104 can be automatically raised for restocking purposes when the shelf is pulled out, then re-engaged once the shelf has been returned to the closed position.
- an audio alert may be incorporated that indicates that the shelf is being restocked with product.
- a stationary shroud 180 may be placed toward the top of the product display and management system.
- the shroud provides security by inhibiting access to the product from above the product.
- a lock box can be placed anywhere on the system to store additional product that will be secured by a key lock or some other locking mechanism.
- various aspects of the invention are added to portions of existing shelves.
- Aspects of the present invention can be added solely to the portion of a shelf management and display system with respect to those high-theft products.
- a barrier 140 could be placed solely over those products.
- side walls could be placed to cover one or more of the sides of the products to further deter sweeping or other theft.
- a front barrier, a locking mechanism or other aspects of the invention described herein could be used solely with the high-theft products or other highly relevant products in a display and not used with other products in the same display.
- a particular set of relevant products can be effectively segregated from the other products within the same display. This particular set of relevant products can be subject to additional security aspects described herein that are not used with the remaining products in the display.
- an adjustable power bar 400 that may be selectively mounted to the back wall 106 .
- the power bar 400 will provide electrical power to various components mounted to the shelves, including any video monitors, security cameras, lighting, illuminated signage, overhead header lights, radios, stereos, or any other components that may be mounted to a shelf or the product display and require electrical power.
- the power bar 400 is selectively adjustable between several positions to accommodate shelf height changes or adjustments without causing obstruction with the mounting or adjustment of the shelf.
- power outlets were mounted to the shelf and were not easily movable. In fact, significant force was required to unlock the power outlets from the track on which they were mounted to then move the power outlets.
- the power outlets were mounted to conductive tracks, similar to track-lighting tracks which included embedded power tracks. With those track-type systems, the power outlets needed to be placed at correct locations and snap-fit into position. Once installed, the power outlets were not slidable.
- the power bar 400 of the invention solves these problems and other known problems by providing a power source for a product display that is easily mountable to the display, such as the back wall 106 , and is easily adjustable to accommodate changes made to the positions of the shelves.
- the power bar 400 includes an elongated body 402 that may be attached to the back wall 106 of the display. As illustrated, the power bar 400 may be mounted in a vertical manner and the elongated body 402 may extend the entire height of the product display or alternatively less than the entire height of the product display.
- the power bar 400 may be slidably moved (as indicated by direction arrow 401 ) a sufficient distance to avoid interference with the product shelf that may be placed at approximately the same vertical height, or with the repositioning of the mounted product shelf.
- the power bar 400 includes one or more power outlets 404 that may be configured at numerous positions on the power bar 400 . Once in the desired position, a fastener, not shown, may be positioned through an adjustment slot 406 to secure the power bar 400 to the back wall 106 at the desired height.
- the adjustment slot 406 is elongated to permit further adjustment of the power bar 400 .
- the elongated body 402 defines an elongated hollow cavity 408 through which may pass conducting wires 410 that are used to supply the power to the power bar outlets 404 .
- the elongated body 402 may also include a recessed channel 412 formed in the body 402 and along each side of the body 402 .
- the channel 412 may be used as a receptor for receiving and aligning the power bar 400 onto the body 402 .
- the power bar 400 may fit on or within the channel 412 in a tongue-and-groove manner, or any other suitable mounting connection that permits slidable movement of one component relative to another. Once installed, the power bar 400 will slide relative to the body 402 in or on the channel 412 .
- FIGS. 34-59 illustrate an embodiment of a box-shelf that may be secured directly to an upright.
- the box-shelf may be provided as a complete unit that provides theft-prevention benefits as discussed above while allowing for more straightforward installation in a retail location.
- the box-shelf may be configured to be self-contained so as to eliminate the need for a support shelf.
- a box-shelf 3405 includes a top 3420 and two sides 3422 that can be connected together to form part of a housing 3408 .
- a recessed portion 3421 is provided so that in the event that the box-shelf 3405 is mounted under a shelf, the recessed portion 3421 will aid in ensuring there is no interference with the brackets that support the shelf or other structure that may extend downward (not shown).
- One or more shelf supports 3430 are mounted to the box shelf 3405 so as to enable the box shelf 3405 to be mounted to a vertical support (not shown) in a traditional manner.
- a slidable shelf 3410 is mounted to one or more tracks 3416 , which can be supported at least in part by the sides 3422 .
- the slidable shelf 3410 can include a support surface 3412 that supports a divider 3418 (which may be a pusher or a simple divider) and includes a rail 3445 mounted to the front of the shelf 3410 .
- the rail in turn supports a retainer 3414 .
- a door 3424 with one or more handles 3426 can be mounted to the top 3420 via hinge system 4010 and is coupled to a control unit 3515 that may be configured to produce an audible tone (immediately or after some predetermined delay) when the door is opened and may further be configured to provide a signal to a remote device so as to trigger video capture or security personal.
- a control unit 3515 may be configured to produce an audible tone (immediately or after some predetermined delay) when the door is opened and may further be configured to provide a signal to a remote device so as to trigger video capture or security personal.
- Slidable shelf 3410 translates via a track 3416 when locking feature 3525 is actuated.
- the door 3424 needs to be opened and in an embodiment, as depicted, the door may open up to 90 degrees.
- the rail 3445 can also be mounted on the top 3420 of the box shelf 3405 .
- FIGS. 37 a -37 b show the locking feature 3525 in a locked or blocking position and an opening and non-blocking position.
- an opening in the lip 3547 allows a key to be inserted so as to translate the locking feature 3525 from the locked to the open position.
- the locking feature 3525 is shown in both the blocked and open position in a number of the Figures.
- one or more box shelves 34 - 5 may be mounted on top of each other.
- a path 3810 can allow the insertion of a key (not shown) to actuate the locking feature 3525 .
- the door 3424 can be pivotally mounted to support 3925 .
- a hat channel 3915 can be provided for additional strength and rigidity of the box shelf 3405 .
- the hat channel 3915 may also be used to support the locking feature 3525 and/or one or more tracks 3416 .
- two shelf supports 3430 (sometimes referred to as brackets) are mounted to a rear panel 3940 and include slots so as to allow the box shelf to be mounted to vertical supports in an adjustable manner even if the position of the vertical supports include some degree of tolerance stack-up.
- the shelf supports 3430 can be connected to one or more vertical rails (not shown) of a shelving structure.
- FIGS. 40-47 illustrate additional details of the depicted embodiment of the box shelf.
- the box-shelf may be constructed out of known materials, such as powder coated 18 gauge steel or some other appropriate material.
- FIG. 48 illustrates an embodiment of the support surface 3412 and includes reference to cross-sections J-J and P-P.
- the lip 3547 can include a blocking lip 4910 in the center of the shelf (or in some other location aligned with the locking feature 3525 ) but the blocking lip may not be required in other locations, thus allowing (but not requiring) a reduction in the amount of material used to make the support surface 3412 .
- FIGS. 52-54 illustrate details one embodiment of the locking feature 3525 .
- FIG. 52 shows the hinge plate 5215 both in a partially exploded view and in an installed position. As depicted, the hinge plate 5215 is mounted to hinge base plate 5225 by a fastener 5230 that couples to a nut 5240 . A biasing element 5235 directs the hinge plate 5215 toward a first or locked position. Thus, hinge plate 5215 a is a locked position and hinge plate 5215 b is an open position. As can be appreciated, however, numerous other methods of mounting the hinge plate 5215 to the hinge base plate 5235 are possible.
- FIGS. 54-59 illustrate additional details regarding embodiments of the locking feature 3525 , shelf support 3430 and other potential elements of the box shelf 3405 .
- FIG. 59 depicts section H-H, from which FIG. 46 is taken. It should be noted that any dimensional references are merely exemplary and are not intended to reflect any limitations to the present invention unless otherwise noted.
- FIGS. 60-73 illustrate another aspect of the invention, namely a low profile shelf system that improves the merchandising of product.
- the low profile shelf system improves product merchandising by creating more spacing between shelves to accommodate larger product.
- product management systems such as those described above
- the product management system are not the most ideal systems to use because there is not sufficient height (i.e., spacing) between shelves to add such a system.
- the product is merchandised so tightly between shelves that adding a product management system, such as those described above, raises the product such that it may interfere with the shelf above.
- Each low-profile shelf support 600 may define a back portion 602 and a front portion 604 .
- the back portion 602 may include a fastening plate 606 attached thereto ( FIG. 72 ), each fastening plate 606 having at least one hook formation 610 that can be inserted into a slotted upright (not shown).
- the fastening plate 606 may be fastened to the shelf support through the use of fasteners 623 .
- the back portion 602 may form the at least one hook formation 610 ( FIG. 60 ). As shown in FIG.
- the back portion 602 of the shelf support 600 may have a thickness that is substantially greater than the thickness of the front portion, resulting in the front portion 604 having a significantly lower profile than the back portion of the shelf support 600 .
- This reduced profile of the front portion results in greater clearance between product shelves to accommodate larger product and/or the installation of the product management systems described herein.
- the thickness of the back portion 602 may be 75% greater than the thickness of the front portion 604 .
- Other thicknesses of the front and back portions are possible to create the desired low profile shelf support configuration.
- the shelf supports 600 may be positioned beneath and secured to a shelf 614 .
- a pusher system 616 may be mounted to the shelf 614 .
- the pusher system may include a pusher track 618 and a pusher 620 . Any of the pusher systems described herein may be used with the low profile shelf supports 600 .
- a product divider 625 may be mounted to the shelf 614 or made part of the pusher system 616 , as described herein.
- a pivotable barrier 640 and a front product retaining wall 642 may be mounted to a front rail 644 , which may be mounted to the front of the shelf 614 .
- the front rail 644 may include one or more channels 645 for receiving one or more retaining walls 642 or signage identifying the products being merchandised.
- the front rail 644 may also be configured to receive the pusher system 610 in either a slidable or non-slidable manner.
- the barrier 640 may be configured similar to the barriers described herein.
- the retaining wall 642 may be configured similar to the retaining walls also described herein.
- an alert device 650 may be mounted to the shelf 614 at or near the back portion 602 . Similar to alert device 142 , the alert device 650 may be used to detect when the pivotable barrier 640 is moved or opened and send an appropriate alert signal, as illustrated above. With this embodiment, the alert device 650 may include a switch 652 that is activated by a linkage 654 that operatively contacts the pivotable barrier 640 ( FIG. 64 ). The linkage 654 may be a metal or plastic rod or flat stock of a suitable material. With this embodiment, the barrier 640 may include a cam-shaped end 641 mountable to the front rail 644 , as shown in FIG.
- a linkage cover 662 may be mounted over the linkage 654 to cover and protect the linkage 654 .
- a security box-shelf 670 may be secured to the low-profile shelf support 600 (or to the vertical uprights) and over the pusher system 610 .
- the box-shelf 670 may be provided as a complete unit that provides theft-prevention benefits as discussed above and may be configured to be self-contained so as to eliminate the need for a support shelf.
- the box-shelf 670 may include a top 672 that may be made of clear material to permit products to be seen in the box-shelf 670 .
- the box-shelf 670 may also include two sides 674 and a back wall 676 that may be joined together to form the box-shelf 670 .
- a front security rail 678 may be mounted to the top 672 (as shown in FIG. 69 ).
- the security rail 678 may also be configured to receive a pivotable barrier 640 .
- the barrier 640 may be similar to the barriers described above and may be opened to permit access to the products merchandised within the box-shelf 670 .
- An alert device may also be operatively coupled to the barrier 640 .
- optional signage 690 may be mounted to the shelf 614 that is supported by the low profile shelf supports 600 .
- One or more signage supports 692 may be used to support the signage 690 .
- the supports may be mounted to one or more horizontal mounting brackets 694 for added stability of the signage 690 .
- multiple low profile shelf supports 600 may be positioned underneath the shelf 614 , depending on the size and configuration of the shelf. It should further be understood that multiple pusher systems 616 and dividers 625 may be positioned on the shelf 614 to merchandise multiple rows of product on the shelf.
- FIGS. 79-91 illustrate another aspect of the invention, namely a merchandise system 810 .
- the merchandise system 810 improves product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf by using various methods such as slowing the rate at which product can be pushed towards the front edge of a merchandising shelf.
- merchandise system 810 includes a base 812 .
- the base 812 defines a generally flat planar surface that may be configured to engage with or mount onto any known shelf used in a store, as well as any other merchandise system 810 , and in any known mounting configuration and orientation.
- the base 812 defines a front edge 826 , a back edge 828 , a first side edge 820 , a second side edge 822 , and one or more tracks 814 .
- a housing 850 can be mounted to the base 812 in any known mounting configuration and orientation.
- the housing 850 defines a top wall 852 , a first side wall 854 , a second side wall 856 , and a front retaining wall 876 .
- First and second side walls 854 and 856 can be used such that when more than one merchandise system 810 is placed adjacent to another like merchandise system 810 on a shelf or stacked on top of another like merchandise system 810 , product resting on the base 812 of each respective merchandise system 810 remains separated or divided.
- one merchandise system 810 can be stacked on top of another merchandise system 810 without need of a separate shelf between the two merchandise systems.
- front retaining wall 876 is mounted at an angle, (for example, approximately a 45° angle) relative to the base 812 and extends from the second side edge 822 to first side edge 820 towards the front edge 826 . Angles other than approximately 45° are possible, including angles of approximately 15°, 30°, 60° and 75°, to name a few.
- Front retaining wall 876 can define a channel 888 located proximate the base 812 . Channel 888 further can define a detent 886 .
- Front retaining wall 876 and first side wall 854 define an opening 878 through which, as will be explained below, product can be removed by a customer or employee.
- front retaining wall 876 does not fully extend from the second side edge 822 to first side edge 820 .
- a lever 880 can be operatively coupled to the merchandise system 810 for ejecting product through the opening 878 .
- lever 880 is slidably mounted within the channel 888 .
- the lever 880 can include a lever biasing element 882 and a lever hook 884 adapted to move product.
- lever biasing element 882 can be a coil spring positioned between lever hook 884 and detent 886 .
- the one or more tracks 814 extend along the base 812 from the back edge 828 to the front retaining wall 876 . As shown, a track 814 can be used with a pusher 816 . It should be understood that more or less than two tracks could be used with the invention, depending on the particular application.
- the base 812 further defines a rack aperture 988 for use with a rack 986 as will be discussed below.
- the one or more tracks 814 extend longitudinally along the length of the base 812 and define at least one rail 830 and an elongated aperture or channel 832 in the base 812 .
- the aperture 832 and rail 830 are sized and shaped to receive and mount a mating element of the pusher 816 .
- the pusher 816 is slidably mounted to the base 812 such that the pusher 816 does not lift out of the track 814 .
- the present invention contemplates the use of other shapes of rails and apertures to mount the pusher 816 to the base 812 . Other pusher mounting techniques are possible with the invention.
- the pusher 816 also contains at least one pusher urging element 860 used to urge the pusher 816 toward the front of the shelf.
- the pusher urging element 860 may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring.
- the present invention may use one or more pusher urging elements 860 to urge the pusher 816 depending on the desired application.
- the pusher urging element 860 may be mounted to the pusher 816 and the base 812 using any known mounting technique. In the exemplary embodiment, one end of the pusher urging element 860 is secured to the base 812 near the front edge 826 of the base 812 , and the opposing end of the pusher urging element 860 is positioned behind the pusher 816 to urge the pusher 816 toward the front of the shelf.
- pusher 816 includes an angled pusher face 892 .
- angled pusher face 892 is positioned such that its angle relative to the base 812 corresponds to the angle of front retaining wall 876 . It should be understood, however, that angled pusher face 892 can be positioned at other angles and can have various dimensions and shapes.
- pusher 816 will urge the product toward the front retaining wall 876 .
- the opening 878 is equal in dimension to less than the width of two products.
- the opening 878 is no more than approximately 50 % wider that the width of a single product.
- the opening 878 is roughly the width of a single product yet wide enough to allow a single product to pass through the opening 878 .
- opening 878 hampers a customer or employee's ability to remove products using solely digits (i.e., fingers) or digital force.
- a force can be applied to lever 880 such that lever 880 can be slidably translated.
- lever hook 884 engages the most forward positioned product.
- lever biasing element 882 when lever 880 is in a fully extended position, lever biasing element 882 is compressed between lever hook 884 and detent 886 . Accordingly, when a customer or employee stops applying force to the lever 880 , lever biasing element 882 biases lever 880 back into its original position.
- the pusher 816 when customers or employees reach and pull out the product available to them, the pusher 816 is slowly urged toward the front retaining wall 876 by pusher urging element 860 and, after a pre-determined period of time, a single product once again is positively pressured between the pusher 816 and the front retaining wall 876 such that the product is adjacent opening 878 .
- An attempt by a customer or employee to remove or urge the next product forward after a first product is removed is hampered because the product is positioned at an angle corresponding to angled pusher face 892 and thus, if a customer or employee attempts to tip the product forward, the product will be biased in a standing position by the second side wall 856 .
- the speed at which the pusher moves can be controlled by various devices including, without limitation, a dampened gear assembly discussed below.
- an exemplary dampened gear assembly 980 may be mounted to the pusher 816 .
- the dampened gear assembly 980 may include a gear 982 and a gear housing 984 that can be filled with any dampening fluid known in the art.
- a portion of gear 982 is housed within gear housing 984 .
- a rack 986 can be mounted to rack aperture 988 .
- the rack 986 defines a plurality of teeth 990 .
- Gear 982 of gear assembly 980 is adapted to engage the plurality of teeth 990 of rack 986 .
- gear assembly 980 acts to slow the rate at which pusher 816 is urged forward. This can be accomplished because rotation of gear 982 is regulated by the dampening fluid located in gear housing 984 which acts to resist movement of the gear 982 within gear housing 984 . Again, other dampening techniques may be used with the present invention to affect the desired slow rate of movement of the pusher toward the front of the shelf.
- front retaining wall 876 is made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through front retaining wall 876 .
- front retaining wall 876 enables advertisements or marketing materials to be placed on front retaining wall 876 .
- Base 812 also can include a display area 999 (see FIG. 79 ) for advertising or marketing material as well as product information such as product pricing information. Because display area 999 can include product information, merchandise system 810 can be, as was discussed above, stacked on top of another like merchandise system 810 without the use of shelves.
- a locking device (not shown) can be used to prevent the removal of product.
- Such locking device may include a rotatable barrier, a door, or a locking clip.
- the locking device could prevent product from fitting through opening 878 such that when the merchandise system 810 is not in use, neither employees nor customers can access the product.
- first side wall 854 and second side wall 856 are reversed and thus, opening 878 is on the opposite side.
- opening 878 is on the opposite side.
- the angled pusher face 892 , front retaining wall 876 , and the lever 880 are also reversed.
- a housing 950 defines a top wall 952 , a first side wall 954 , and an opposing second side wall.
- a front edge of the base 812 is configured to mount to or on a rail 924 in any known manner.
- the base 812 may include a rack and rack aperture wherein the rack defines a plurality of teeth 990 (as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 ) such that a gear of a gear assembly can be adapted to engage the plurality of teeth 990 .
- the rail 924 includes a front retaining wall 976 to retain product that is pushed toward the rail. Front retaining wall 976 and housing 950 define an opening 978 that is roughly equal to the width of a single product.
- the pusher 916 will urge the product toward the rail 924 .
- product can only be removed through the top portion 979 of the opening 978 .
- a device such as a lever trigger (not shown), may be used to facilitate a customer or employee to partially or fully eject product through the top portion 979 of the opening 978 .
- FIGS. 92A-101C illustrate another aspect of the invention, namely a merchandise system 1010 .
- the merchandise system 1010 improves product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf by using various methods such as an electronic lock-out mechanism which locks the merchandising shelf and multiple shelves when too many products are removed at one time.
- the merchandise system 1010 may generally include a base 1012 and housing 1050 , a door assembly or door 1020 , a locking assembly, and an electronic control unit 1080 .
- merchandise system 1010 includes a base 1012 .
- the base 1012 defines a generally flat planar surface that may be configured to engage with or mount onto any known shelf used in a store, as well as any other merchandise system 1010 , and in any known mounting configuration and orientation.
- the base 1012 defines a front edge 1016 , a back edge 1017 , a first side edge 1018 , a second side edge 1019 , and one or more tracks 1014 .
- the base 1012 may include a ratchet shaft slot 1015 .
- the ratchet shaft slot 1015 may be configured to accept the ratchet shaft 1066 as will be described below.
- the ratchet shaft slot 1015 may extend longitudinally along the length of the base 1012 .
- the ratchet shaft slot 1015 is sized and shaped to receive and mount the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- a housing 1050 can be mounted to the base 1012 in any known mounting configuration and orientation.
- the housing 1050 defines a top wall 1052 , a first side wall 1054 , and a second side wall 1056 .
- the housing 1050 may also include a rear retaining wall (not shown in the figures).
- the first and second side walls 1054 and 1056 respectively, can be used such that when more than one merchandise system 1010 is placed adjacent to another like merchandise system 1010 on a shelf or stacked on top of another like merchandise system 1010 , product resting on the base 1012 of each respective merchandise system 1010 remains separated or divided.
- one merchandise system 1010 can be stacked on top of another merchandise system 1010 without need of a separate shelf between the two merchandise systems.
- the one or more tracks 1014 may extend along the base 1012 from the back edge 1028 to the door 1020 .
- a track 1014 can be used with a pusher 1040 . It should be understood that more or less than two tracks could be used with the invention, depending on the particular application.
- the one or more tracks 1014 extend longitudinally along the length of the base 1012 and may define at least one rail and/or an elongated aperture or channel in the base 1012 .
- the track is sized and shaped to receive and mount a mating element of the pusher 1040 .
- the pusher 1040 may be slidably mounted to the base 1012 such that the pusher 1040 does not lift out of the track 1014 .
- the present invention contemplates the use of other tracks to mount the pusher 1040 to the base 1012 . Other pusher mounting techniques are possible with the invention.
- the pusher 1040 also contains at least one pusher urging element 1044 used to urge the pusher 1040 toward the front of the shelf.
- the pusher urging element 1044 may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring or a spiral torsion spring.
- the present invention may use one or more pusher urging elements 1044 to urge the pusher 1040 depending on the desired application.
- the pusher urging element 1044 may be mounted to the pusher 1040 and the base 1012 using any known mounting technique.
- one end of the pusher urging element 1044 is secured to the base 1012 near the front edge 1016 of the base 1012 , and the opposing end of the pusher urging element 1044 is positioned behind the pusher 1040 to urge the pusher 1040 toward the front of the door 1020 .
- the merchandise system 1010 also includes a product door assembly.
- the door assembly may include a door 1020 , a door pin 1030 , a door spring 1032 , a door stiffener 1034 , and a door spacer 1036 .
- the door 1020 may be designed to rotate outward while holding only one product and allow the consumer to remove only one product from the merchandise system 1010 .
- the door 1020 may be in a closed position or an open position. The operation of the door 1020 will be explained in more detail below.
- the door 1020 may include a handle 1022 .
- the handle 1022 as shown in FIG. 92A is located on the upper section of the door 1020 , such that the door 1020 can be opened from the top of the door 1020 .
- the handle 1022 can be other configurations that allow a consumer to pull open the door 1020 from the upper section of the door 1020 .
- the door 1020 may also include a first roller 1024 and a second roller 1026 .
- the first roller 1024 may be engaged with an upper slot 1055 located on the first side wall 1054 of the housing 1050 .
- the second roller 1026 may be engaged with a lower slot 1057 located on the first side wall 1054 of the housing 1050 .
- the slots 1055 1057 and rollers 1024 1026 may be located on either side of the housing 1050 and the door 1020 respectively.
- the rollers 1024 and 1026 are configured to slide from one end of its corresponding slot 1055 1057 to the other end of the corresponding slot 1055 1057 during the operation of the door 1020 .
- the specific operation of the door 1020 will be described more below.
- the door 1020 may also include an opening 1028 .
- the opening 1028 may be located on the consumer side of the door 1020 and may allow the consumer or user to press or touch the product without opening the door 1020 . As will be described further below, the opening 1028 can be used during the restocking process.
- the door assembly may also include a door pin 1030 and a door spring 1032 , as illustrated in FIGS. 92A and 93 .
- the door pin 1030 may be cylindrical in shape and may be any suitable material, such as plastic or metal.
- the door spring 1032 as shown in FIG. 92A , is a spiral torsion spring or a flat coil spring that includes a first end or free end and a second end.
- the door spring 1032 may be other suitable spring types without departing from this invention.
- the door pin 1030 and the door spring 1032 engage both the door 1020 and the base 1012 to attach the door 1020 to the base 1012 .
- the door pin 1030 may be located at the base or bottom of the door 1020 .
- the first end or free end of the door spring 1032 may engage the door pin 1030 at the base or bottom of the door 1020 .
- the second end of the door spring 1032 may engage a portion of the locking mechanism of the merchandising system 1010 , such as a locking gear 1062 as will be described below.
- the door assembly may include a door stiffener 1034 as shown in FIG. 92A .
- the door stiffener 1034 may be located at the bottom of the door 1020 .
- the door stiffener 1034 may provide additional support, especially to the bottom of the door 1020 as the door 1020 is rotated from the closed position to the open position.
- the door assembly may include a door spacer 1036 .
- the door spacer 1036 may be installed against the back side of the door 1020 to create a slot for the product when the door 1020 is opened.
- the door spacer 1036 may be required so that the door 1020 and merchandise system 1010 can accommodate different size packages of product.
- a wide door spacer 1036 may be installed to the door 1020 for smaller or thinner packages and a thin or even no door spacer 1036 may be installed to the door 1020 for larger or thicker packages.
- the door spacer 1036 may take on various different shapes to accommodate the different sizes and shapes of the packages.
- the door 1020 and specifically the front of the door 1020 , is made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through the door 1020 . Additionally, the door 1020 may enable advertisements or marketing materials to be placed on the front of the door 1020 . Additionally, the base 1012 can include a display area for advertising or marketing material as well as product information such as product pricing information. Because the display area can include product information, merchandise system 1010 can be, as discussed above, stacked on top of another merchandise system 1010 without the use of shelves. Additionally, instead of using a door 1020 as described above, the merchandising system may include a button-release system that includes a button to help access or dispense product. For example, when the button is pressed, the product may be released by the use of a pusher or a slow-moving pusher to discharge the product at a bottom opening for the customer to recover.
- a button-release system that includes a button to help access or dispense product. For example, when the button is pressed, the product may
- the merchandise system 1010 as illustrated in FIGS. 92A, 98A, and 98B may also include a locking assembly.
- the locking assembly may generally include a locking bar 1060 , a locking gear 1062 , a locking latch 1064 , a ratchet shaft 1066 , and a pusher lock 1068 .
- the locking bar 1060 is an elongated bar that extends approximately the lateral length of the base 1012 .
- the locking bar 1060 may be located along the bottom or underneath the base 1012 .
- the base 1012 includes an opening 1018 A located along the first side 1018 and a second opening located along the second side 1019 (not shown).
- the locking bar 1060 may fit within this opening 1018 A.
- the locking bar 1060 may include a locking member 1061 located on the side of the locking bar 1060 as illustrated in FIG. 92A .
- the locking member 1061 may be configured to engage the locking latch 1064 during locking operations as will be described further below.
- the locking bar may include a slot 1063 .
- the slot 1063 may be configured to engage a locking end 1067 of the ratchet shaft 1066 during locking operations as will be described further below.
- the locking bar 1060 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. Additionally, the locking bar 1060 may be configured to attached to an adjacent locking bar 1060 when multiple merchandise systems 1010 are configured together adjacently.
- the locking mechanism also includes the locking gear 1062 .
- the locking gear 1062 may include a set of gear teeth on one end and a rounded surface on the other end.
- the gear teeth of the locking gear 1062 may be configured to engage with the locking latch 1064 during locking operations as will be described further below.
- the door spring 1032 may be located on the rounded surface end to provide the bias for the door to open and close. The door opening operation will be described further below.
- the locking gear 1062 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic.
- the locking mechanism also includes the locking latch 1064 .
- the locking latch 1064 may be configured to engage with the locking bar 1060 , and specifically the slot 1063 on the locking bar 1060 .
- the locking latch 1064 may also be configured to simultaneously engage with the locking gear 1062 .
- the locking latch 1064 may engage both the locking bar 1060 and the locking gear 1062 during locking operations as will be described further below.
- the locking latch 1064 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic.
- the locking mechanism also includes the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- the ratchet shaft 1066 is sized and shaped to fit within the ratchet shaft slot 1015 in the base 1012 .
- the ratchet shaft 1066 includes one side with a plurality of teeth 1069 .
- the other sides of the ratchet shaft 1066 may be smooth.
- the ratchet shaft 1066 may also include a locking end 1067 .
- the locking end 1067 may be located at the approximately location of the locking bar 1060 , such that the locking end 1067 engages the locking bar 1060 and specifically the locking slot 1063 on the locking bar 1060 during locking operations as will be described below.
- the plurality of teeth 1069 are configured to engage the end of the pusher lock 1068 during locking operations as will be described below.
- the ratchet shaft 1066 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic.
- the locking mechanism also includes the pusher lock 1068 .
- the pusher lock 1068 may be connected to or engaged with the pusher 1040 .
- the pusher lock 1068 may have a pointed end opposite the side that is engaged with the pusher 1040 .
- the pointed end of the pusher lock 1068 may be configured to engage the plurality of teeth 1069 on the ratchet shaft 1066 during locking operations as will be described below.
- the pusher lock 1068 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic.
- the operation of the merchandise system 1010 includes both locking and door opening and these operations can be done simultaneously.
- FIG. 93 the merchandise system 1010 is shown in an unlocked condition with the door 1020 closed. In this configuration, the door 1020 is closed and the door spring 1032 is not extended or uncoiled. The locking bar 1060 is not extended. The locking latch 1064 is not engaged with the locking gear 1062 .
- the ratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that one of the smooth sides faces upward toward the pusher lock 1068 . As annotated as reference letter “A” in FIG. 93 , when the ratchet shaft 1066 is in the position as shown, the pointed end of the pusher lock 1068 rests on the smooth side of the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- FIG. 94 illustrates a similar configuration that includes product with the merchandise system 1010 in an unlocked condition with the door 1020 closed.
- FIG. 95 illustrates a configuration with the merchandise system 1010 in an unlocked condition with the door 1020 open.
- the door 1020 is open with the door spring 1032 extended and uncoiled.
- the locking bar 1060 is not extended.
- the locking latch 1064 is not engaged with the locking gear 1062 .
- the ratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that one of the smooth sides faces upward toward the pusher lock 1068 .
- reference letter “B” in FIG. 93 when the locking latch 1064 is in the position shown, the locking gear 1062 can rotate freely, thereby allowing the door spring 1032 to uncoil and the door 1020 to swing open when pressure is applied to the door handle 1022 .
- FIG. 96 illustrates a configuration with the merchandise system 1010 in a locked condition with the door 1020 closed.
- the door is closed with the door spring 1032 not extended and not uncoiled.
- the locking bar 1060 is extended.
- the locking bar 1066 forces the locking latch 1064 to engage the locking gear 1062 and the locking bar 1066 rotates the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- the locking latch 1064 is engaged with the locking gear 1062 .
- the ratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that the side with the plurality of teeth 1069 faces upward towards the pusher lock 1068 , thereby engaging the pusher lock 1068 with one of the plurality of teeth 1069 on the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- FIG. 97 illustrates a configuration with the merchandise system 1010 in a locked condition with the door 1020 open.
- the door is open with the door spring 1032 extended and uncoiled.
- the locking bar 1066 forces the locking latch 1064 to engage the locking gear 1062 and the locking bar 1066 rotates the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- the locking latch 1064 is engaged with the locking gear 1062 .
- the ratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that the side with the plurality of teeth 1069 faces upward towards the pusher lock 1068 , thereby engaging the pusher lock 1068 with one of the plurality of teeth 1069 on the ratchet shaft 1066 .
- FIG. 98A illustrates a bottom view of the merchandise system 1010 in an unlocked condition.
- the locking bar 1060 is not extended. Because the locking bar 1060 is not extended, the slot 1063 on the locking bar 1060 presses against the locking end 1067 of the ratchet shaft 1066 and keeps the ratchet shaft 1066 in the position with the pusher lock 1068 resting on the smooth side of the ratchet shaft 1066 . Additionally, because the locking bar 1060 is not extended, the locking member 1061 is not engaged with the locking latch 1064 , thereby allowing the locking gear 1062 to rotate freely and allow the door spring 1032 to uncoil and the door 1020 to swing open.
- FIG. 98B illustrates a bottom view of the merchandise system 1010 in a locked condition.
- the locking bar 1060 is extended.
- the slot 1063 on the locking bar 1060 presses against the locking end 1067 of the ratchet shaft 1066 , thereby rotating the ratchet shaft 1066 such that the side with the plurality of teeth 1069 faces upward and engages the pusher lock 1068 .
- the locking member 1061 engages the locking latch 1064 , thereby moving the locking latch 1064 to engage with the locking gear 1062 and the gear teeth.
- the locking gear 1062 cannot rotate clockwise, and thus the door spring 1032 cannot uncoil. This locks the door 1020 from swinging open.
- FIG. 99 illustrates another feature of the merchandise system 1010 , namely the operation of the door 1020 .
- the door includes a first roller 1024 and a second roller 1026 .
- the first roller 1024 may slidably engage with an upper slot 1055 in the housing 1050 .
- the second roller 1026 may slidably engage with a lower slot 1057 in the housing 1050 .
- the back end and the floor of the door 1020 keeps the next product behind the door from sliding forward.
- the door 1020 continually contacts the product along the same vertical plane throughout the door's motion. As is shown in FIG.
- the door operation is represented from the closed position to the open position, with “A” representing the closed position and “E” representing the open position.
- the first roller 1024 is positioned in the lower portion of the slot 1055
- the second roller is positioned in the lower portion of the slot 1057 and the door handle 1022 is closed.
- the first roller 1024 moves a longer distance along the upper slot 1055 than does the second roller 1026 along the lower slot 1057 .
- the first roller 1024 has almost moved to the end of the upper slot 1055 , while the second roller 1026 has not moved much along the lower slot 1057 .
- the second roller moves a longer distance along the lower slot 1057
- the first roller 1024 moves a smaller distance along the upper slot 1055 .
- the second roller 1026 again moves a longer distance along the lower slot 1057 to the final upper position in the lower slot 1057 and the first roller 1024 moves a small amount into the final upper position in the upper slot 1055 .
- the design and shape of the upper slot 1055 and the lower slot 1057 combined together with the geometry of the door 1020 allow the door to contact the product on the same vertical plane throughout the motion of the door 1020 , thereby keeping the next product behind the door from sliding forward. Once the product is removed from the door 1020 by the consumer, the pusher 1040 and pusher spring 1044 will push the next product into the door 1020 when the door 1020 returns to the closed position, thereby reloading the door 1020 with product.
- the merchandise system 1010 may include an electronic control unit 1080 to control the locking operations of all merchandise systems linked together. As shown in FIG. 100 , multiple merchandise systems 1010 may be linked together. Additionally, an electronic control unit 1080 may be located at the end of the linked merchandise systems 1010 . The electronic control unit 1080 may be used to improve product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from the merchandise systems 1010 by locking and/or alarming the merchandise systems 1010 when too many products are removed at one time.
- the electronic control unit may include a mechanical member (not shown) linked to the locking bars 1060 of the adjacent merchandise systems 1010 .
- This mechanical member may be activated to move based on the parameters set in the electronic control unit 1080 , thereby extending or moving the linked locking bars 1060 of the merchandise systems 1010 .
- the linked locking bars 1060 extend or move, the locking bars 1060 lock the doors 1020 and the pushers 1040 on the merchandise systems 1010 as described above.
- a number of parameters may be included or loaded into the electronic control unit 1080 to control the flow of product by alarming and/or locking the merchandise systems 1010 without departing from this invention.
- One such parameter may be the electronic control unit 1080 locking the merchandise systems after a certain number of consecutive door openings, such as three door openings. For example, if a consumer attempts to open any three doors consecutively on the merchandise system 1010 , the electronic control unit 1080 may then alarm and send a signal to the mechanical member, thereby extending and moving the locking bars 1060 and locking the doors 1020 .
- This parameter may be changed based on the needs of the store or consumers and products, such as after two times, four times, five times, or more.
- Consecutive may also be varied within the electronic control unit 1080 .
- “consecutive” may mean three door openings within a 10-minute time period, or within a 5-minute time period. Additionally, “consecutive” could mean that time between individual or multiple door openings must be greater than two minutes, or greater than one minute, or greater than some other time variable. Multiple variations of number of openings and time variables may be used for the electronic control unit 1080 without departing from this invention.
- the electronic control unit 1080 may also be configured to send a signal to an alarm system or messaging system.
- the electronic control unit 1080 may send a signal to an intercom system in a store the signals the store personnel to come to the merchandise system 1010 to either reset the system or to deal with a possible theft situation.
- the electronic control unit 1080 can send an electronic signal to many other devices or systems, including, but not limited to, office phones, cell phones, cash registers, office computers, emails, etc.
- the electronic control unit 1080 may light an alarm light 1082 , as illustrated in FIG. 100 .
- the electronic control unit 1080 may also include a key system 1081 as illustrated in FIG. 100 .
- the key system 1081 may be utilized to reset an alarm or locked situation. Additionally, the key system 1081 may be utilized to override the locking system if a key is left in the key system 1081 . This override capability may be advantageous to store personnel when stocking or restocking the merchandise system 1010 .
- the key system 1081 may be utilized for various other functions without departing from this invention.
- the door assembly may also include a door spacer bar 1090 as illustrated in FIGS. 101A, 101B, and 101C .
- the door spacer bar 1090 may be used as an alternative to the door spacer 1036 illustrated in FIGS. 92A and 93 .
- the door spacer bar 1090 may include an attached end 1092 and a locking end 1094 .
- the attached end 1092 may be attached, pinned, or connected to the door 1020 near the front of the door 1020 such that the locking end 1094 of the door spacer bar 1090 can rotate away from the front of the door 1020 .
- the locking end 1094 may rotate away from the front of the door 1020 .
- the locking end 1094 may move and be locked into place in one of a plurality of door spacer bar teeth 1096 .
- the door spacer bar teeth may be configured to lock the locking end 1094 of the door spacer bar 1090 at the depth of the package.
- the door spacer bar 1090 may include a door spacer bar locking tab 1098 located to lock in the top of the rotational door spacer bar as illustrated in FIGS. 101A, 101B, and 101C .
- the door spacer bar locking tab 1098 may slide from an unlocked position to a locked position, wherein the locking tab 1098 locks the attached end of the door spacer bar 1090 .
- the door spacer bar 1090 may allow the user to adjust the door for different depths of packages in the display.
- FIG. 101A illustrates the door spacer bar 1090 not adjusted for depth of packages. As illustrated in FIG. 101A , the door spacer bar 1090 is flush against the front of the door 1020 and the locking tab 1098 is in the locked position, thereby locking the door spacer bar 1090 in place.
- FIG. 101B illustrates the door spacer bar 1090 being adjusted for a thinner depth of package. As illustrated in FIG. 101B , the locking tab 1098 may slide to the unlocked position and the door spacer bar 1090 is rotated away from the front of the door 1020 .
- FIG. 101A illustrates the door spacer bar 1090 not adjusted for depth of packages. As illustrated in FIG. 101A , the door spacer bar 1090 is flush against the front of the door 1020 and the locking tab 1098 is in the locked position, thereby locking the door spacer bar 1090 in place.
- FIG. 101B illustrates the door spacer bar 1090
- 101C illustrates the door spacer bar 1090 in the adjusted position and locked for a thinner depth of a package. As illustrated in 101 C, the locking tab 1098 is positioned back in the locked position and the locking end 1094 of the door spacer bar 1090 is seated in one of the plurality of door spacer bar teeth 1096 .
- FIGS. 102 through 106E illustrate another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIGS. 102 through 106E illustrate a merchandise system 2000 that improves product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf by using various methods.
- the merchandise system 2000 may generally include a base 2030 and housing 2050 , and a window or door 2010 .
- FIG. 102 illustrates a merchandise system 2000 that holds a number of products, such as cans (for example, baby formula cans) in the merchandise system that would be accessible to the customer one at a time out of the front of the merchandise system 2000 .
- merchandise system 2000 includes a base 2030 .
- the base 2030 defines a generally flat planar surface that may be configured to engage with or mount onto any known shelf used in a store, as well as any other merchandise system 2000 , and in any known mounting configuration and orientation.
- the base 2030 defines a front edge 2032 , a back edge 2034 , a first side edge 2036 , a second side edge 2038 , and one or more tracks 2033 .
- a housing 2050 can be mounted to the base 2030 in any known mounting configuration and orientation.
- the housing 2050 defines a top wall 2052 and a pair of side walls 2054 .
- the housing 2050 may also include a rear retaining wall (not shown in the figures).
- the one or more tracks 2033 may extend along the base 2030 from the back edge 2034 to the front edge 2032 .
- FIG. 103A is a front view of the merchandise system 2000 .
- FIG. 103B is another isometric view of the merchandise system 2000 .
- FIGS. 103C and 103D are isometric views of the base 2030 and track 2033 of the of the merchandise system 2000 .
- a track 2033 can be used with a pusher 2040 . It should be understood that more or less than two tracks could be used with the invention, depending on the particular application.
- the one or more tracks 2033 extend longitudinally along the length of the base 2030 and may define at least one rail and/or an elongated aperture or channel in the base 2030 .
- the track 2033 is sized and shaped to receive and mount a mating element of the pusher 2040 .
- the pusher 2040 may be slidably mounted to the base 2030 such that the pusher 2040 does not lift out of the track 2033 .
- the present invention contemplates the use of other tracks to mount the pusher 2040 to the base 2030 . Other pusher mounting techniques are possible with the invention.
- the pusher 2040 also contains at least one pusher urging element used to urge the pusher 2040 toward the front of the shelf.
- the pusher urging element may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring or a spiral torsion spring.
- the present invention may use one or more pusher urging elements to urge the pusher 2040 depending on the desired application.
- the pusher urging element may be mounted to the pusher 2040 and the base 2030 using any known mounting technique. In the exemplary embodiment, one end of the pusher urging element is secured to the base 2030 near the front edge 2032 of the base 2030 , and the opposing end of the pusher urging element positioned behind the pusher 2040 to urge the pusher 2040 toward the front of the window 2010 .
- each merchandise system 2000 may also have a slow moving pusher 2040 with a damper attached to the pusher 2040 to slow the movement of the product from the back to the front of the merchandise system 2000 .
- the merchandise system 2000 uses a track 2033 and a slow pusher 2040 so that after a product is removed, a slow moving pusher 2040 moves product forward.
- the merchandise systems 2000 may be mounted to a surface using fasteners through the floor of the merchandise system 2000 .
- each merchandise system 2000 may include its own individual security window or door 2010 attached to the merchandise system 2000 .
- the window may be rotatable from a closed position to an open position about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the housing, such that the window 2010 is rotatable in an upward or vertical direction.
- the window 2010 may be made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through the window 2010 .
- the merchandise system 2000 may also include a geometric aperture 2035 on the sidewalls 2034 towards the front of the merchandise system 2000 . The geometric aperture 2035 may make it difficult (even with the security window 2010 open) for a consumer to get their fingers around enough of the next can or product moving forward to pull it out of the merchandise system 2000 until the product has advanced forward as designed.
- FIGS. 104A and 104B illustrate top-down isometric views of the merchandise system 2000 .
- the merchandise system 2000 may include an audio box 2016 included with the merchandise system 2000 .
- the audio box 2016 may be located on the top wall 2052 of the housing 2050 .
- the merchandise system 2000 with the audio box 2016 may be triggered in a similar fashion to the other merchandise systems 2000 as described above. Additionally, there may be another different type of merchandise system 2000 wherein the audio box is not included on the top wall 2052 of the housing 2050 .
- Both types of merchandise systems 2000 may include a trigger axle 2012 located just behind the hinge point of the window 2010 .
- the trigger axle 2012 may also include a cantilever 2014 . As illustrated in FIGS. 104A and 104B , when the window 2010 is rotated, it rotates the trigger axle 2012 and the cantilever 2014 attached to the trigger axle 2012 .
- the cantilever 2014 may rotate up against a switch trigger on the audio box 2016 to sound the audio box 2016 on the merchandise system 2000 .
- FIGS. 105A through 105E illustrate isometric views of the merchandise system 2000 in operation with a first product 2002 .
- FIG. 105A illustrates the merchandise system 2000 with the window 2010 closed and the first product 2002 located inside the housing 2050 .
- FIG. 105B illustrates the merchandise system 2000 with the window 2010 rotated and lifted up and the first product 2002 being removed from the housing 2050 .
- FIG. 105C illustrates the merchandise system 2000 with the window 2010 still rotated open and the first product 2002 removed from the housing 2050 .
- a second product 2003 is seen located in the housing 2050 at this stage.
- FIG. 105D illustrates the merchandise system 2000 with the window 2010 still rotated open with the second product 2003 starting to slowly slide forward with the pusher 2040 .
- FIG. 105E illustrates the merchandise system 2000 with the window 2010 closed again and the second product 2003 located inside the housing 2050 .
- FIGS. 106A through 106E illustrate an example merchandise system 2000 that includes multiple housings 2050 .
- the trigger axle 2012 may include both a male connection point 2020 on one side and a female connection point 2022 on the opposite side.
- the circle illustrated in FIG. 106D shows the male connection point 2020 and the female connection point 2022 of the trigger axle 2012 .
- the merchandise system 2000 may include a housing 2050 with an audio box 2016 or a housing 2050 without an audio box.
- the trigger axels 2012 of additional (non-audio and audio) merchandise systems 2000 can be mated together so that a single audio merchandise system 2000 can be activated by numerous non-audio merchandise systems 2000 .
- 106E illustrates a first merchandise system 2000 A that includes an audio box 2016 attached to a second merchandise system 2000 B that is a non-audio system.
- Both merchandise systems 2000 A, 2000 B include the trigger axles 2012 A, 2012 B and the cantilevers 2014 A, 2014 B attached together in order to switch the trigger to sound the audio box 2016 on the merchandise system 2000 A.
- the trigger axle 2012 may allow a number of non-audio merchandise systems 2000 to be connected in-line with each other and ultimately to one of the merchandise systems 2000 that includes an audio box. Once the merchandise systems 2000 are connected together (with non-audio box and audio box systems), any of the windows on the connected, non-audio merchandise systems 2000 can trigger the single audio box housed in the audio merchandise system 2000 . This allows a mechanical approach to connecting multiple, less-expensive, non-audio merchandise systems 2000 to a single audio merchandise system 2000 , which makes the average cost of the audio per facing significantly lower. This may also decrease the battery replacement for store employees to one audio box per linear run rather than multiple audio boxes in the same run.
- the merchandise system 2000 may include a “guillotine” type device that could be activated by the opening of the security window.
- the guillotine portion When the door 2010 is lifted upwards, the guillotine portion may extend downwards into the two “pockets” formed on either side of the tangent point (from a top view) between a product or can in front and a product or can immediately behind it. This guillotine portion would effectively block the removal of the next product or can until the slow pusher moved the product or can forward enough to allow the guillotine to fall behind that product or can when the window is opened.
- the merchandise system 2000 may include a mechanical lock-out device for all windows of the attached merchandise systems 2000 .
- This may be similar in design to a mechanical version of the electronic lock-out module as described above and illustrated in FIGS. 92A through 101C .
- This mechanical lock-out module may include incorporating a fluid-filled damper element attached to the trigger axle 2012 .
- the use of a fluid-filled damper element may allow the merchandise system 2000 to have a set number of door openings before triggering a mechanical lock-out of all of the attached security windows. Once the fluid-filled damper relaxes, the damper would allow the windows to be opened once again.
Landscapes
- Display Racks (AREA)
Abstract
A merchandising system that improves the merchandising of product by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf. The merchandising system may include a base configured to support product and a housing configured to engage the base. The housing may comprise a top wall, a first side wall, a second side wall, and a front retaining wall. The merchandise system may be configured to hold a number of products, such as cans (for example, baby formula cans) in the merchandise system that would be accessible to the customer one at a time out of the front of the merchandise system. The front of each merchandise system may include its own individual security window attached to the merchandise system that allows the customer to remove one can at a time.
Description
- This application is a continuation of pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/431,350 filed on Jun. 4, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/828,777 filed on Dec. 1, 2017, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,349,755, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/165,470, filed on May 26, 2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,844,280, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/044,361, filed on Oct. 2, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,375,100, which claims benefit to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/708,967, filed Oct. 2, 2012, and also is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/858,574, filed on Apr. 8, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,526,351, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/544,363, filed on Jul. 9, 2012, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,413,823, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/230,362, filed on Sep. 12, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,235,227, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/872,721, filed Aug. 31, 2010, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,047,385, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/496,389, filed Jul. 1, 2009, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,113,601, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/858,545, filed Sep. 20, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,621,409, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/685,530, filed Mar. 13, 2007, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,451,881, which claims benefit to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/782,000, filed Mar. 13, 2006, and which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/612,210, filed Dec. 18, 2006, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,299,934, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/140,023, filed May 27, 2005, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,150,365, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/047,915 filed Feb. 1, 2005, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,661,545, which claims benefit to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/541,804 filed Feb. 3, 2004. All of the above listed applications are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- The present invention relates generally to shelf assemblies for use in merchandising product and more particularly to shelf assemblies that improve the securement and management of merchandised product.
- It is known that retail and wholesale stores, such as drug stores, grocery stores, discount stores, toy stores, and the like require and use a large amount of shelving both to store product and to display the product to consumers. In displaying product to consumers to promote and improve store sales, these stores situate or position the product toward the front of the shelf so that the product is visible and easily accessible to consumers. This desirable positioning has certain drawbacks. For instance, with this desirable “front-facing” of product, the stores are finding that relatively small products or packages of high value can be the target of thieves. Certain items can represent a high value to potential thieves who can either resell the items or use them for other illegitimate purposes, as in the case of certain pharmaceutical products. This theft is increasing and is now a significant cost to the retailer because thieves prefer to steal many products at once or in as short amount of time as possible. To do this, for example, thieves will “sweep” the shelf with their arm collecting the items into a purse, bag or coat very quickly and exit the store without drawing attention.
- Theft can be the result of both customers and employees actions and has been difficult to eliminate. Attempts to deter and prevent theft have proven to be only partially effective. For instance, in-store cameras often do not observe the theft clearly enough to catch or prosecute the thief. In addition, in-store security personnel are rarely in the correct position to actually observe a thief in action. As a result, theft continues to be a significant problem and cost in the management of product inventory.
- The present invention is directed at overcoming these and other known drawbacks and problems with existing shelving systems.
- The present invention overcomes the above-mentioned problems by addressing the securement and management of product in a retail setting. As will become evident below, the invention has the ability to inhibit “sweeping” of product by a thief and to limit the taking of large amounts of product from a shelf in a short period of time. Using one or more methods such as placing the shelves closer together, using product dividers that extend from the front edge of the shelf and between the shelves, using a merchandising system that controls the speed of a pusher, placing front walls having a specific height that results in a smaller opening to limit access to product, using an electronic control unit and an electronic lock-out mechanism which locks the merchandising shelf and multiple shelves when too many products are removed at one time, the present invention will inhibit sweeping of product and the removal of numerous products at a time. The present invention also has the ability to alert store or security personnel and security cameras of a potential theft situation, while minimizing the impact on access to product by legitimate shoppers.
- In an embodiment, a merchandising system comprises a base configured to support product, a housing configured to engage with the base, comprising a top wall, a first side wall, and a second side wall, a pusher movably mounted on the base, a rotatable window from a closed position to an open position about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the housing, and a trigger axle located adjacent to the hinge point of the window, wherein when the window is rotated, the trigger axle is rotated. The trigger axle may include a cantilever that is attached to the trigger axle. The merchandising system may further include an audio box configured to sound an alarm. When the window is rotated, the trigger axle and/or the cantilever may rotate against a switch trigger located on the audio box to sound the audio box. In another embodiment, the merchandising system may include an audio box configured to sound an alarm, wherein the trigger axle includes a cantilever that is attached to the trigger axle, wherein when the window is rotated, the cantilever rotates against a switch trigger located on the audio box to sound the audio box.
- Other features and advantages of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art upon review of the following detailed description, claims and drawings in which like numerals are used to designate like features.
-
FIG. 1 depicts a front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a product securement and management system of the present invention. -
FIG. 2 depicts a partial side elevation view of the exemplary securement and management system ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 3 depicts a bottom view of an exemplary embodiment of a pullout shelf that may be used with the present invention. -
FIG. 4 depicts front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of the product securement and management system of the invention incorporating the pullout shelf. -
FIG. 5 depicts a side elevation view of an exemplary pullout shelf illustrating the product dividers and the restocking of product on the shelf. -
FIG. 6 depicts a side elevation view of an exemplary mounting of a front retaining wall and a secondary retaining wall to the shelf in addition to an exemplary pusher mechanism. -
FIG. 7 depicts a front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a front retaining wall and a secondary retaining wall. -
FIG. 8 depicts a front elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a front retaining wall and a secondary retaining wall with product displayed on the shelf. -
FIG. 9 depicts a bottom view of an exemplary alert device mounted to the exemplary securement and management system ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 10 depicts an exemplary lock mechanism that may be used with the present invention. -
FIG. 11 depicts an exemplary embodiment of a movable barrier and barrier extension that may be used with the present invention. -
FIG. 12 depicts a close up view of the movable barrier and barrier extension ofFIG. 11 . -
FIG. 13 depicts a close up view of an exemplary handle that may be used with the movable barrier or barrier extension ofFIG. 11 . -
FIG. 14 depicts a close up view of the movable barrier and barrier extension ofFIG. 11 defining an opening and mounting structure for receiving the lock mechanism ofFIG. 10 . -
FIG. 15 depicts a partial front elevation view of the exemplary securement and management system ofFIG. 1 including the use of a security camera. -
FIG. 16 depicts a partial front elevation view of the exemplary securement and management system ofFIG. 1 including the use of a video monitor. -
FIG. 17 depicts a diagram of an exemplary switching operation between a camera image and an image from a video player on the monitor ofFIG. 16 . -
FIG. 18 depicts another exemplary lock mechanism that may be used with the present invention. -
FIG. 19 depicts another view of the exemplary lock mechanism ofFIG. 18 . -
FIG. 20 depicts a back view of the exemplary lock mechanism ofFIG. 18 . -
FIG. 21 depicts yet another exemplary lock mechanism that may be used with the present invention. -
FIG. 22 depicts another view of the exemplary lock mechanism ofFIG. 21 . -
FIG. 23 depicts a close-up view of the lock plate of the exemplary lock mechanism ofFIG. 21 . -
FIG. 24 depicts another view of the lock plate ofFIG. 23 . -
FIG. 25 depicts an exemplary embodiment that includes the use of a clip that may be used to further secure a side wall to the shelf. -
FIG. 26 depicts an isometric view of the clip ofFIG. 25 . -
FIG. 27 depicts a close-up view of the mounted clip ofFIG. 25 . -
FIG. 28 depicts an exemplary electrical power bar that may be used with the invention. -
FIG. 29 depicts another view of the power bar ofFIG. 28 . -
FIG. 30 depicts an exemplary embodiment that includes a side wall that may be used to provide further security for product on a shelf or a portion of a shelf. -
FIG. 31 depicts another view of the wall ofFIG. 30 . -
FIG. 32 depicts an isometric view of a clip that may be used to further secure a side wall to the shelf. -
FIG. 33 depicts another view of the clip ofFIG. 32 . -
FIG. 34 illustrates an isometric view of an embodiment of a box shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 35 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an embodiment a box shelf with a slideable shelf in a second position in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 36 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an embodiment a box shelf with a slideable shelf in a first position in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 37A-37B depict cross-sections of an embodiment of a hinge plate engaging a blocking lip in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 38 depicts an embodiment of two box shelves stacked on top of each other in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 39 illustrates a partial exploded view of an embodiment of a box shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 40A-40D illustrate various views of an embodiment a housing in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 41 illustrates a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a housing and a door in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 42-45 illustrate views of an embodiment of a box shelf with various features omitted to provide additional details in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 46 illustrates a cross-section of a slideable shelf with a divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 47 illustrates a partially exploded view of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 48A-48C illustrate various view of an embodiment of a support surface of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 49 and 50 depict cross-sections of a portion of an embodiment of support surface of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 51 illustrates an embodiment of a portion of a slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 52A-52C illustrates an isometric, partially exploded view of an embodiment of a hinge plate and construction in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 53A-53E illustrate a number of views of an embodiment of a hinge plate in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 54A-54F illustrate a number of views of an embodiment of a hinge base configured to couple with the hinge plate ofFIG. 53 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 55A-55D illustrate a number of views of an embodiment of a shelf support in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 56 illustrates a cross-section of portions of a shelf support configured to engage vertical rails in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 57 illustrates a cross-section of an embodiment of a rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 58A-58E illustrate various views of an embodiment of a housing of a box shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 59A-59D illustrate various view of an embodiment of slideable shelf in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 60 is a side view of an exemplary low profile shelf support. -
FIG. 61 is an exploded isometric view of a shelf system incorporating the low profile shelf support ofFIG. 60 . -
FIG. 62 is another exploded isometric view of a shelf system incorporating the low profile shelf support ofFIG. 60 . -
FIG. 63 is a side view of a shelf system incorporating the low profile shelf support ofFIG. 60 and an alert device and moveable barrier. -
FIG. 64 is a partial enlarged view of the shelf system ofFIG. 63 further illustrating the moveable barrier in contact with a linkage which is also in contact with the alert device. -
FIG. 65 is a partial enlarged view of the shelf system ofFIG. 63 further illustrating the alert device in contact with a linkage which is also in contact with the moveable barrier. -
FIG. 66 is an isometric view of the shelf system ofFIG. 61 with a box shelf mounted to the shelf. -
FIG. 67 is an isometric exploded view of the box shelf ofFIG. 66 . -
FIG. 68 is a side view of the shelf system ofFIG. 66 . -
FIG. 69 is a partial enlarged view of the shelf system ofFIG. 68 . -
FIG. 70 is an isometric view of the shelf system ofFIG. 61 with signage mounted to the shelf. -
FIG. 71 is a side view of the shelf system ofFIG. 70 . -
FIG. 72 is an isometric exploded view of the shelf system ofFIG. 61 with multiple low profile shelf supports and with optional mounting brackets. -
FIG. 73 is an isometric view of the shelf system ofFIG. 72 . -
FIG. 74 is an isometric view of an adjustable wall that may be used to provide further security for product on a shelf or a portion of a shelf. -
FIG. 75 is a side view of the adjustable wall ofFIG. 74 . -
FIG. 76 is an end view of the adjustable wall ofFIG. 74 . -
FIG. 77 is an isometric view of the adjustable wall ofFIG. 74 . -
FIG. 78 is another isometric view of the adjustable wall ofFIG. 74 . -
FIG. 79 is an isometric view of an exemplary merchandising system. -
FIG. 80 is another isometric view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 . -
FIG. 81 front view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 . -
FIG. 82 is a side view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 . -
FIG. 83 is a partial side view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 . -
FIG. 84 is a top view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 . -
FIG. 85 is another front view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 . -
FIG. 86 is another front view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 illustrating product being removed from the merchandising system. -
FIG. 87 is another isometric view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 79 illustrating product being moved toward the front end of the merchandising system. -
FIG. 88 is a bottom view of an exemplary merchandising system. -
FIG. 89 is a partial bottom view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 88 . -
FIG. 90 is a side view of an exemplary merchandising system. -
FIG. 91 is another side view of the merchandising system ofFIG. 90 illustrating product being removed from the merchandising system. -
FIG. 92A is partial exploded view of an embodiment of a merchandise system in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 92B is an isometric view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 93 is a side view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 94 is a side view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 95 is a side view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 96 is a side view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 97 is a side view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 98A is a partial bottom view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 98B is a partial bottom view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 99 is a side view of the merchandise system ofFIG. 92A in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention illustrating the opening of the door. -
FIG. 100 is an isometric view of multiple merchandise systems with an electronic control unit in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 101A-C depict an alternative embodiment of the door spacer bar of the invention. -
FIGS. 102 through 106E depict various views of an alternative embodiment of a merchandise system in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 102 is an isometric view of an alternative embodiment of a merchandise system in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 103A is a front view of the merchandise system illustrated inFIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIG. 103B is another isometric view of the merchandise system illustrated inFIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 103C and 103D are isometric views of a track of the of the merchandise system illustrated inFIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 104A and 104B illustrate top-down isometric views of the merchandise system illustrated inFIG. 102 in accordance with one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 105A through 105E illustrate isometric views of the example merchandise system illustrated inFIG. 102 in operation with a product in accordance one or more aspects of the present invention. -
FIGS. 106A through 106E illustrate isometric views of the example merchandise system illustrated inFIG. 102 connecting and in operation with multiple merchandise systems in accordance one or more aspects of the present invention. - Before the embodiments of the invention are explained in detail, it is to be understood that the invention is not limited in its application to the details of construction and the arrangement of the components set forth in the following description or illustrated in the drawings. The invention is capable of other embodiments and of being practiced or being carried out in various ways. Also, it is to be understood that the phraseology and terminology used herein are for the purpose of description and should not be regarded as limiting. Rather, the phrases and terms used herein are to be given their broadest interpretation and meaning. The use of “including” and “comprising” and variations thereof is meant to encompass the items listed thereafter and equivalents thereof as well as additional items and equivalents thereof. The use of the terms “mounted,” “connected,” “coupled,” “positioned,” “engaged” and similar terms, is meant to include both direct and indirect mounting, connecting, coupling, positioning and engaging.
- The present invention relates to the securement, management, and distribution of products in settings such as a retail setting and includes numerous embodiments. One embodiment involves a shelf management and display system that resides either on a standard or existing “dealer” shelf typically found in a retail store or on a shelf designed with certain advantages in securing products and deterring theft. The embodiment may include uprights of a pre-existing shelving system or may be a stand alone unit. The display system includes front-facing systems, which force product to the front of a shelf. Such systems may use various methods, such as gravity, friction, magnetism, or spring-urged pushers or paddles to bring product to the front of a shelf near the aisle. Many examples of spring-urged systems that orient products toward the front of a shelf exist and include the systems described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,041,720 to Hardy, U.S. Pat. No. 4,830,201 to Breslow, and International Application No. PCT/US02/15760 and corresponding International Publication No. WO 02/091885 A1 to Hardy, which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Referring to
FIGS. 1 and 2 , in one embodiment of the present invention, a shelf management anddisplay system 100 includesvertical uprights 102 andproduct shelves 104 removably mounted to the uprights. Theshelves 104 may be mounted at various positions along theuprights 102 depending on the desired positioning and spacing of theshelves 104. Similarly, theshelves 104 may be moved or relocated to different positions along theuprights 102 as necessary. As shown inFIGS. 4 and 5 , theshelves 104 may be pull-out shelves that pull away from theuprights 102 like drawers. As illustrated byFIG. 3 , theshelf 104 may incorporate a locking device 117 which involves cooperating catches that contact each other in the locked position and substantially release this contact in the unlocked position and that when released will permit theshelf 104 to pull-out and away from the uprights. The shelves or uprights may involve other locking devices, such as magnets, latches, notches, binders, tension or the like. Once pulled away, the store personnel can restock the shelf with product and then slide theshelf 104 back to its original position and relock the shelf. - A
back wall 106 may be mounted to theuprights 102 through known mounting techniques to aid in containing the products and to prevent access to the products from the back of thedisplay system 100. Alock box 108 may be mounted to theuprights 102 also through known mounting techniques. Thelock box 108 may be used for storing and locking additional product and shelving components for quick retrieval by the store personnel. Thelock box 108 may be positioned at any position on theuprights 102, including the depicted positioning at or near the top of thedisplay system 100. In an alternative embodiment, thelock box 108 may be secured to ashelf 104 as opposed to theuprights 102. With either mounting location, the additional product and shelving components are located at thedisplay system 100 and can therefore be readily retrieved by store personnel. - An exemplary embodiment of the invention may include a series of walls or
dividers 110 that are placed between product rows, lanes or facings, and at the ends of the facings, to deter product “sweeping” by a thief. Thesewalls 110 are sometimes referred to as “product dividers.” As used herein, the terms “vertical walls,” “product dividers” and “dividers” are meant to include any wall (including vertical and non-vertical), divider, barrier, or separator that may be used between product rows, lanes or facings. Theproduct dividers 110, when positioned in a spaced-apart manner on thedisplay system 100,form product lanes 112 for locating and separating product to be merchandised. - The
product dividers 110 or side walls also are positioned at the sides of the product facing to prevent access to the product from the side of thedisplay system 100. In one embodiment, these dividers or side walls may include telescoping features that permit them to extend vertically or horizontally to provide additional product securement. Significantly, these dividers or side walls may be used in numerous applications as the size and extent of these can be adjusted to fit most shelves, shelving or display systems, or applications. - A pusher 126 can be used to urge product forward. This pusher can incorporate a coil spring to assist in urging product forward. The
divider 110 in some embodiments can include a base or floor. In some embodiments this floor includes a pusher track 128.FIG. 6 shows the floor on one side of the divider wall. A second floor can be on the opposite side of the divider wall. With floors on both sides of the vertical divider wall, product can rest on these floors. In one such embodiment, a product can rest on one floor of one divider and a second floor of a second divider. - The
product dividers 110 define a height, shape and configuration that deter the removal of product over theproduct dividers 110. Thedividers 110 extend in a vertical or non-vertical manner between theshelves 104 and from the front of theshelf 104 to theback wall 106. Thedividers 110 have a generally rectangular shape; however, other shapes and configurations of the dividers, such as non-rectangular, oval, repeating patterns or the like, may be used with the invention. Depending on the product to be merchandised and the desired degree of access to the products, thefront edge 114 of theproduct dividers 110 may extend vertically between theshelves 104, or may extend non-vertically to make the products more accessible to the consumer and easier to remove from the shelf. In one embodiment, thedivider 110 defines a front edge 111 that includes a front edge portion 113 protruding outward from the front edge 111, as shown inFIG. 5 . The protruding portion of the front edge will assist in holding the retaining wall or tab 122 in position to prevent slidable movement of the retaining wall or tab 122, as described below. - The
product dividers 110 may be mounted to thedisplay system 100 using numerous techniques. As an example, thedividers 110 may be inserted into tracks formed in theshelf 104 or tracks formed in a base that attaches to theshelf 104. Similarly, thedividers 110 may be formed integral or as a unitary unit with a base that is mounted to the shelf. Also, thedividers 110 may be mounted to a rail, channel, or groove as understood by those skilled in the art. Thedividers 110 should be sufficiently rigid to retain the product within the product lanes. Examples of dividers that may be used with invention are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,041,720 to Hardy, U.S. Pat. No. 4,830,201 to Breslow, and International Application No. PCT/US02/15760 and corresponding International Publication No. WO 02/091885 A1 to Hardy, which are incorporated herein by reference. One skilled in the art will appreciate that other dividers and techniques for mounting the dividers to the shelves are known and may be used with the teachings of the invention. - In one embodiment, the
dividers 110 may have a step down or decline near its rear edge, or a decrease in wall height, to allow thewall 110 to be lifted and disengaged from the rail on which it is mounted. With this configuration, thedividers 110 may be moved laterally without interfering with the shelf above it. In one embodiment, the vertical wall ordivider 110 has a step down beginning approximately ⅔ of the wall length from its front edge. - In an embodiment, it may be desired to provide enhanced security for items on only a portion of a shelf. These items may be located in the center of the shelf or on a side of the shelf. Security features such as those referenced herein can be added to only a portion of the shelf, while the remainder of the shelf contains fewer or none of the security features. Where high security items are placed in the center of a shelf, these items can be segregated from the remainder of the shelf through the use of walls. These walls can provide the side barriers for the high security portion of the shelf. These walls can be made of strong construction, such as metal, and can extend from the floor of a shelf to a distance fairly near the top of the shelf. These walls also can be attached to the shelf as well as the other security features to limit the possibility of the walls being bent, removed or otherwise thwarted and to assist in limiting access to the items being merchandised on the shelf.
- Referring to
FIGS. 25, 30 and 31 ,walls Walls top section 344 and a bottom section 346. As shown inFIG. 31 , these two sections can overlap to provide a continuous barrier. Thetop section 344 ofwall 340 and the bottom section 346 ofwall 340 can include apertures that align the two walls. Afastener 348 such as a screw, bolt, pin, rod or other fastener can be used to join the two walls at a particular height. The walls also can comprise afloor 342 which includes apertures and can be connected to the floor of the shelf through a fastener 349 such as a screw, bolt, pin, rod or other fastener. - Referring to
FIGS. 74-78 , in an alternative embodiment, thewalls adjustable wall 702 that is slidably movable and repositionable. Thewall 702 defines one or more elongated channels orslots 704 that permit movement of thewall 702 and adjustment of the location of thewall 702 to a desired position. In an exemplary embodiment, thechannels 704 may be vertically and horizontally oriented on theadjustable wall 702. Thewall 702 may be moved and positioned, as desired, and secured to alower wall portion 706 through the use offasteners 708, such as screws, bolts, pins, rods or or the like. Thelower wall portion 706 may include numerous holes 709 for receiving thefasteners 708 and may include afloor 710 which may include a plurality ofholes 711 for mounting thefloor 710 to the to the floor of the shelf as described above. For convenience in adjusting thewall 702 relative to thelower wall portion 706, atool 714, such a hex key, wrench, screw driver, or the like, may be mounted to thelower wall portion 706 to be used by a user to make the desired adjustments of the location of thewall 702. - As should be readily apparent, the
elongated channels 704 provide for numerous mounting positions of thewall 702 relative to thelower wall portion 706. In an exemplary position, thewall 702 is fastened to thelower wall portion 706 such that thefasteners 708 are located atpositions 716 a and 716 b in theelongated channel 704. In this position, as shown byFIG. 75 , thewall 702 will be in an unextended position. In one of the numerous alternate positions, thewall 702 may be positioned and thefasteners 708 may be located atpositions wall 702 will be in an extended position such that thewall 702 extends upward relative to thelower wall portion 706 and away from the lower wall portion. In this position, thewall 702 may serve as an additional barrier to inhibit access to the shelf and thereby further secure the products on the shelf. As yet another example, thewall 702 may be positioned and thefasteners 708 may be located atpositions 716 b and 716 e. In this position, thewall 702 will be in an extended position such that thewall 702 extends away from the lower wall portion and will be at the same height as the lower wall portion. It should be readily apparent that numerous other positions of thewall 702 relative to the shelf are possible depending on the desired level of security and the configuration of the shelf, and thetool 714 provides convenience and ease of adjustment of thewall 702. It should be understood that the elongated channel may define numerous other configurations that still permit movement and adjustment of thewall 702 relative to the lower portion. The system illustrated byFIGS. 74-78 may further be configured and mounted on either or both ends of the shelf, and if desired, to the front or rear of the shelf. Also, the wall may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. - Referring to
FIGS. 25-27, 30-33 a clip orclip member wall shelf 104 and in particular the walls that separate secure products from non-secure products. Theclip divider 110 to a shelf 104 (embodiment not shown). Theclip wall clip wall clip walls 140, 150 also are known as side walls. - In an exemplary embodiment, the
clip hinge rail 322, which is used to hinge thebarrier 140, discussed below, to theshelf 104. Thehinge rail 322 is mounted to a shelf. Theclip hinge rail 322. Theclip wall clip 320 includes a blade portion 324 that is configured to engage with thehinge rail 322 and at any of the multiple positions along thehinge rail 322, thus providing flexibility in the placement of theclip 320. The blade portion 324 may take on numerous shapes and configuration and may be connected to or joined with aclip body 328. Theclip body 328 is further connected to or joined with opposingwall mounting members 330. Thewall mounting members 330 are configured to be positioned on opposing sides of awall 340 with the wall passing between the mountingmembers 330. Thewall mounting members 330 further define alignedholes 332 for receiving a mountingfastener 334 that may be used to secure the mountingmembers 330 to thewall 340, as depicted byFIG. 27 . The alignedholes 332 may be thru holes or threaded holes. As can be appreciated, any type of fastener or securement technique may be used to secure theclip 320 to thewall 340. - Where a
wall clip 360 can be used to further secure thewall shelf 104. At the edge of the shelf, the hinge rail ceases (not shown).Clip 360 includes ablade portion 362 that extends in only one direction from theclip body 364. Theblade portion 362 is configured to engage thehinge rail 322. In an embodiment, the blade portion engages only a single hinge piece or knuckle of the hinge rail. For example, inFIG. 27 , a single hinge piece or knuckle is designated by 323. Theblade portion 362 includes afirst blade portion 363 and asecond portion 366 that can be at an angle tofirst portion 363. Thesecond portion 366 can be configured to interact with the side 324 ofknuckle 323. Theblade 362 may take on numerous shapes and configuration and may be connected to or joined with aclip body 364. Theclip body 364 is further connected to or joined with opposingwall mounting members 368. Thewall mounting members 368 are configured to be positioned on opposing sides of awall 350 with the wall passing between the mountingmembers 368. Thewall mounting members 368 further define alignedholes 370 for receiving a mounting fastener (not shown) that may be used to secure the mountingmembers 368 to thewall 350. The alignedholes 370 may be thru holes or threaded holes. As can be appreciated, any type of fastener or securement technique may be used to secure theclip 360 to thewall - A
front retaining wall 116 may be positioned along the front edge of theshelf 104. Thefront retaining wall 116 can serve as a “fence” to restrain the product in theproduct lanes 112 and assist in preventing the product from falling off the front of theshelf 104. The retainingwall 116 stops the forward movement of product that is caused by the urging of the pushers, described below. As exemplified byFIG. 6 , the retainingwall 116 may be mounted to a channel or rail 118 that extends along the front edge 119 of theshelf 104. The channel or rail 118 may be mounted to existing holes in a standard dealer shelf, or secured by any other known manner to theshelf 104. The retainingwall 116 may be mounted to or on the channel or rail 118. Thefront retaining wall 116 may be made of a clear plastic to permit visualization of the product on the shelf and provide a more aesthetically pleasing organization to the merchandised product. Thefront retaining wall 116 can also be created from opaque or semi-transparent material, or from wire, and can be adaptable to display graphics. Thefront retaining wall 116 can have a variety of configurations, such as rectangular, oblong, repeating patterns or the like. - As more clearly shown in
FIG. 7 , thefront retaining wall 116 may also include holes oropenings 120 extending therethrough that are spaced along thewall 116. Theholes 120 permit the consumer and store personnel to push the product back and away from the retainingwall 116 for ease of insertion and removal of the product. - As shown in
FIGS. 1 and 2 , the retainingwall 116 can have a height that permits the removal of a single product at a time or, depending on the desired level of security, a couple of products or a few products at a time. In other words, the height of theretaining wall 116 can permit limited access to and removal of product from thedisplay system 100. Stated another way, the retainingwall 116 is not so tall as to prohibit any access to the product, but is sized to allow the consumer or store personnel to access and lift a limited number of product over the retainingwall 116 at one time. This limited removal of products is accomplished through the use of theretaining wall 116 and the close proximity of theshelf 104 positioned above the product. That is, in one embodiment, theshelf 104 located above the product will be positioned in close proximity to the top edge of the product, or the top edge of theproduct divider 110, whichever is taller. Theshelf 104 located above the product, theproduct dividers 110, and theretaining wall 116 will form an opening orwindow 131 through which only a single, two, or possibly a few, product(s) can be removed at one time or in a single motion. This configuration also deters “sweeping” of product from theshelf 104. The size of thewindow 131 can be adjusted by adjusting the location of theshelf 104 above the product, thedividers 110, and/or theretaining wall 116, or through the use of a second retaining wall 122,barrier 130, and/orbarrier 140, described below. Thiswindow 131 adjustment permits flexibility with the system and allows the store to set thewindow 131 size depending on the product size and how many products they want to permit consumers to remove at a time. - In an exemplary embodiment, if taller products are merchandised on the
shelves 104, or if asmaller window 131 is desired, a second retaining wall 122 may be positioned behind or possibly in front of theretaining wall 116 to serve as a retainer for the product. As used herein, the second retaining wall 122 may be referred to as a “tab” and may include any retaining structure or “fence” that can be selectively configured or mounted to theshelves 104 to provide selective theft prevention of specific products, such as high theft items. Consequently, the second retaining wall or tab 122 may have many configurations, shapes and designs, and may be used in front of individual rows of product or groups of rows of product. - As shown in
FIGS. 6 and 7 , the second retaining wall or tab 122 may be mounted to or on a second channel or rail 124 that extends parallel with the channel or rail 118. The retaining wall or tab 122 may be slidable relative to theshelf 104 or rail 124, or may be fixed relative to theshelf 104 or rail 124. The tab 122 can be positioned betweenadjacent dividers 110 and held in position between thedividers 110. In other words, the tab 122 may not be permitted much slidable movement in or on the channel or rail 124 because thedividers 110 will hinder such slidable movement. In some embodiment, thedividers 110 contain a portion that serves as a stop to prevent the tab or first retaining wall from moving laterally. Such configuration further prevents theft of the product as potential thieves will not be permitted to simply slide the tab 122 to the side and remove numerous products at a time. - The second retaining wall or tab 122 will have a height that permits access to and removal of a limited number of product. If desired, the tab 122 may have a height that permits removal of only one product at a time. With the use of tabs 122, the
display system 100 will have flexibility in that tabs 122 of varying height may be positioned in front of theproduct lanes 112 to accommodate various sized products. That is, if a row of product has a product height that is different than a product in an adjacent row, tabs 122 of varying height can be used to provide the proper level of security and access to the product. - In one embodiment, the tabs 122 may be sized to extend across one
product lane 112 or in front of a single row of product. In an alternative embodiment, the tab 122 may be sized and shaped to extend acrossmultiple product lanes 112. In this embodiment, the tabs 122 could include slots or channels to permit the tabs to “straddle” thedividers 110 and thereby extend across multiple product lanes. In addition, thedividers 110 could extend through the slots or channels and thereby inhibit slidable movement of the tabs 122. - The second retaining wall or tab 122 may also be used in place of the
retaining wall 116. In other words, the front “fence” on a product facing may be the tabs 122 of varying height, length and width, or of the same dimensions. In this configuration, the channel or rail 118 may be used to mount dealer-shelf accessories, such as clip-in signage, price tag holders, and the like. The tab 122 also can be attached to thedivider 110 or can be formed such that the tab 122 anddivider 110 are an integral piece. A wall or partial wall structure such as tab 122 can exist at the front of thedivider 110 and can extend to the left or right or to both the left and right of the divider. This wall or partial wall can be used with or without afront retaining wall 116. - In an exemplary embodiment, the tabs 122 may include holes or openings 125 through the tab 122, similar to the holes or
openings 120 in theretaining wall 116, to permit the consumer and store personnel to push the product back and away from the retainingwall 116 and tab 122 for ease of insertion and removal of the product. In other words, the holes or openings 126 allow product to be replaced by a consumer who removes it and decides not to purchase the product. To this end, the holes oropenings 120, 125 are constructed to allow finger access therethrough to push back the row of product. Once the products are pushed backward, the consumer or store personnel can replace the removed products back into the facing. It should be understood that tabs 122 also can be used that do not include the holes or openings 125. - In an exemplary embodiment, the tab 122 may provide securement for an individual row of a product facing. That is, it may be desirable to provide additional theft deterrence for an individual row of product. In this configuration, the tab 122 having the desired dimensions may be positioned in front of a desired product row to provide additional securement for just that row of product. This embodiment will provide the stores with additional flexibility with their planograms and product facings in that individual tabs 122 of different dimensions may be placed at various locations across the facing to enhance the securement of particular products.
- In an embodiment, retainer tabs 122 can be used on an individual facing basis for specific products. If a shelf is merchandised with product packages of variable height, the
retainer wall 116 must be of a height that allows the shortest product package to be lifted over it. If ashelf 104,barrier 130, orbarrier 140 is employed above the product, then theshelf 104 orbarriers short retainer wall 116. It can be desirable, then, to increase the height of a front barrier only in front of the taller product. The second retaining wall or tab 122 can be of a taller height than the retainingwall 116 and can be generally taller than required for the small product packages. The retainer wall or tab 122 can therefore be constructed and used to limit access to the taller product and removal of several taller products at a time or in one motion, further securing product and deterring theft. Similarly, the retainer wall or tab 122 can be constructed and used to limit access to smaller but deeper products and to limit the removal of several smaller but deeper products at a time or in one motion. The retainer tab 122 thus allows flexible placement of product on a shelf by the retailer and manufacturer, no matter the size, shape, and configuration of the product. - The retaining
wall 116 and tab 122 may be mounted, directly or indirectly, to theshelf 104 using numerous techniques. The retainingwall 116 and tab 122 may be slidably mounted to or receivable in the channels or rails 118, 124, which are secured to the front edge of the shelf through fasteners, adhesives, friction, tension, magnetism, or other restraining techniques and methods. The retainingwall 116 and tab 122 may also be directly mounted or connected to theshelf 104 also through the use of fasteners, adhesives, friction, tension, magnetism, or other restraining techniques and methods. The retainingwall 116 and tab 122 may be fixed to theshelf 104 or removably mounted to theshelf 104 to permit additional flexibility in the design and level of security of the system. - Pushers 126 may be placed behind product between the
back wall 106 and the front edge of theshelf 104 to push the product forward so that it may be removed from the front of the shelf. The retainingwall 116 and tabs 122, if used, in some embodiments can stop the forward movement of product that is caused by the urging of the pushers. Known pushers may be used with the invention, including the pushers and pusher systems described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,041,720 to Hardy, U.S. Pat. No. 4,830,201 to Breslow, and International Application No. PCT/US02/15760 and corresponding International Publication No. WO 02/091885 A1 to Hardy, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. The pushers 126 may be spring-urged pushers that move along a track 128 to push product toward the front edge of theshelf 104, as shown inFIG. 6 . Track 128 can form a floor on one side of the divider. A second floor, with or without a track, can be located on the other side of the divider. - In an embodiment, the pushers 126 may have a pusher face or paddle 129 that may extend laterally to increase the pushing surface of the pusher to thereby pusher wider product more effectively. In other words, the pusher 126 may have an extendable pusher face to push either narrow product or wide product. The pusher face or paddle 129 may be extendable from a retracted position to one of several extended positions. The extended pusher face locates the product pushing surface behind the center or near the center of the wider product, thereby greatly enhancing the pushing leverage on the wider product. Numerous other types of pushers and pusher faces may be used with the invention, including the systems and pushers described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/772,134 to Hardy, which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The pushers 126 may be stand-alone units that are mountable to the
shelf 104 using any known technique, including the channel mounting technique depicted in the figures. That is, in one embodiment, the pusher 126 may be mounted to a front rail or channel 133, as shown inFIG. 6 , and may be slidably adjustable within or on that rail or channel. Alternatively, the pushers 126 may be used in conjunction withdividers 110 and may be operatively mounted to thedividers 110, as disclosed in the above referenced patents and application, or as known in the art. - In another embodiment, the pushers 126 may incorporate spring mechanisms, such as coil springs, that include an indicia strip. The indicia strip is provided on spring mechanism and contains data relating to the position of the pusher 126. A sensor assembly may scan the indicia strip and transmit data representative of the product and the position of the pusher on the display system to a store computer or some other suitable device, such as a portable computer or controller. The transmitted data can be used to determine inventory levels and can be done so in real time. With this embodiment, the amount of product removed from a particular location in the store can be determined. This information can be used to determine the effectiveness of product placement and promotional displays, particularly when a product can be obtained from various places within the retail store. And with respect to deterring theft, a deviation in the typical purchasing habits of the consumer can trigger an alarm. That is, the alarm can be used to alert security personnel to the fact that too much product has been removed from the shelf at one time and thus a potential theft has occurred. The location of the incident can also be used to alert a security camera so as to focus the camera in the direction of the potential theft, as discussed below. With this embodiment, numerous types of sensors and detection techniques may be used to monitor the relative position and movement of the pusher 126. For example, in an embodiment, the indicia strip may contain numerous types of patterns that can be optically readable or can be read using several different types of detection methods, such as passive variable capacitance, inductance, resistance, magnetics, or active signal detection. Numerous other types of sensors and detection techniques are possible with the invention for detecting unusual movement of the pusher 126 that may be indicative of a potential theft situation, including the systems and techniques described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/772,010 to Swafford et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.
- In other exemplary embodiments, the merchandised product may be urged toward the front of the
shelf 104 through other techniques, including friction, gravity and/or magnetism. Each of these techniques may be used with thedisplay system 100 and the teachings of the present invention. These techniques may be used with or withoutdividers 110, depending on the desired application. In one embodiment, the shelf is not completely horizontal but has an incline or decline from back to front. - In another embodiment, the merchandised product may be urged toward the front of the
shelf 104 through vibration or quick movements that orient products in a particular direction on theshelf 104. Vibration can cause products to move forward on theshelf 104 and prevent them from moving backward so that the product is front facing. This vibration may be applied through mechanical, electrical or other structures or designs. - In one embodiment, directed vibration moves product toward the front of the shelf. The directed vibration causes product to move in particular directions or in one direction and not to move in other directions. Through this vibration, which is instituted through the
shelf 104,upright 102, floor, wall, ceiling or other structure, or through a vibrative pulse or signal traveling through the air, the product moves in a particular direction, such as frontward. - In another embodiment of the vibration technique for urging product forward on the
shelf 104, general undirected vibration is applied to the system. This vibration may be applied through theshelf 104,upright 102, floor, wall, ceiling, other structure or through vibration or a signal traveling through the air. Directors, such as small toggles, ridges, flanges, fingers, or the like, cause product to move in a particular direction depending on their configuration, shape, and orientation. These directors can channel the energy from unspecific vibration and force product in a particular direction, such as frontward. The directors can be placed on theshelf 104,divider 110, floors, walls or ceilings of the system and can be incorporated into the product itself. - In an embodiment of the vibration technique, product sits on a floor and friction moves product toward the front of the shelf. In one embodiment, the floor may be a flat surface panel operatively coupled to a motion providing device. In use, product is placed on the flat surface panel and a combination of gravity and friction hold the product in place on the flat surface panel. The motion providing device then slowly moves the flat surface panel toward the retaining
wall 116 located at the front of theshelf 104. After a preset amount of time, or through product position sensing techniques, the motion providing device quickly, in a jerking motion, pulls the flat surface panel in the opposite direction or, in other words, toward the back of the shelf. By doing so, the quick motion of the flat surface panel breaks the bond of friction between the product and the flat surface panel causing the flat surface panel to slide relative to the product and the product to remain at its location. The motion providing device will then repeat the previously described process and begin to slowly move the flat surface panel toward the retainingwall 116. Examples of such vibration techniques for urging product forward on a shelf are disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 60/541,859 to Hardy, which is incorporated herein by reference. - As indicated above, the
dividers 110, retainingwall 116 and tabs 122 assist in preventing a thief from sweeping a number of products into his or her coat or bag or from taking several products in the same facing. To even further limit the access to the product, in another exemplary embodiment, a horizontal barrier 130 (FIG. 2 ) may be included above the product packages and secured to the front edge of theshelf 104 positioned above the product. Thebarrier 130 may be fixed to the front edge of theshelf 104 or may be fixed touprights 102. Thebarrier 130 further deters unobstructed access to the product in the product facing by reducing the area, window or opening through which product could be removed from the shelf. Thebarrier 130 may be constructed separate from the shelf or may be integral with the shelf. Thebarrier 130 may span one row of product on a facing, or may span multiple rows of product, depending on the desired level of security. Alternatively, thebarrier 130 may comprise anothershelf 104 positioned just above the product. In this embodiment, theshelf 104 above the product is positioned in close proximity to the product. Thebarrier 130 restricts access from the front of theshelf 104 to only one or a few products positioned behind the front product in a facing row to permit the removal of only a few products from a shelf, or a product pusher, at one time or in one motion. The retainingwalls 116 and tabs 122 may be used conjunctively with thebarrier 130 to prevent product from being easily removed from theshelf 104. In other words, the present invention contemplates the use of one, two or multiple barriers or walls to prevent several products from being removed from the shelf at a time or in one motion. Thebarrier 130 may be made of various materials and may be secured to the front of theshelf 104 through any known technique. - A further embodiment of the invention incorporates a
barrier 140 that spans across one or two, some, all or the majority of the top of the product on ashelf 104. Thebarrier 140 functions similar to a door in that it may be hinged or movably mounted to the edge of theshelf 104, or thebarrier 130, just above the product to be protected. As used herein, the term “barrier” is meant to include any structure that will prevent, inhibit or obstruct access to the product on theshelf 104. The barrier can embody numerous shapes and configurations. Thebarrier 140 may be mounted to theshelf 104 using existing mounting holes on the shelf. Thebarrier 140 also may be mounted on the front edge of a front rail from the shelf above it. The front edge of the shelf can have hooks or “j” shapes on its underside. Thebarrier 140 can have apertures which fit within the hooks or “j” shapes. Thebarrier 140 defines a bottom lip or edge that may meet or overlap the top edge of theretaining wall 116 or tab 122. Such meeting or overlap further closes off access to the product except with deliberate action. In an exemplary embodiment, as shown inFIG. 13 , thebarrier 140 may include ahandle 202 to assist in moving thebarrier 140 from a closed position to an open position, and vice versa. The handle may be molded with thebarrier 140 along the edge of the barrier as exemplified byFIG. 13 , or the handle may be a separate component attached, mounted, secured, or adhered to thebarrier 140 using any known technique. One skilled in the art will appreciate that the invention is not limited by a particular shape or configuration of the handle and that the handle may define numerous shapes or configurations. Moreover, thebarrier 140 may be configured with a reinforcing rim that extends along the edge of thebarrier 140. The reinforcing rim provides additional structural integrity and rigidity to thebarrier 140. The reinforcing rim may also be equipped or configured with a handle. If thebarrier 140 is configured with a locking mechanism as described herein the reinforcing rim will assist in preventing a potential thief from bending or breaking thebarrier 140 and thus giving the thief access to the product that is intended to be locked and secured on the shelf. - A hole or opening 204 may be located in the
barrier 140 through which may be mounted a cable lock or similar locking mechanism, as discussed below. - In an alternative embodiment, the product display system includes inverted features. The aspects of the invention that are placed on a floor or a shelf and extend upward can be placed on a ceiling or extend downward, and vice versa. For example, the
barrier 140 and retainingwall 116, thedividers 110, and tabs 122 may be inverted. It is contemplated that in some embodiments theretaining wall 116, thedividers 110, and/or tabs 122 may be configured above thebarrier 140 which would extend upwardly from theshelf 104. The retainingwall 116, thedividers 110 and/or tabs 122 may be placed on the underside of the shelf above the product and extend downward. Pushers 126 and/or tracks 128 can be secured to the underside of a shelf such that the pushers extend downward and the pusher springs are located near or behind the portion of the pusher that is near the underside of the shelf. - In some embodiments, to access product behind the
barrier 140, thebarrier 140 must be moved or lifted, which requires a deliberate movement and the use of one hand to hold thebarrier 140 in place. While thebarrier 140 is lifted or moved, the product can be removed. A consumer or store personnel who uses one hand to hold thebarrier 140 in place, will need to use the other hand to remove product from thedisplay system 100. This embodiment is constructed to inhibit the ability of a consumer to access product with two hands at the same time. While product is accessible to the consumer or store personnel, the removal of large amounts of product in a short period of time is deterred. Thebarrier 140 can be created from a clear, opaque or semi-transparent material and may be hinged or slidable in a variety of common ways. - Referring to
FIGS. 11 and 12 , an adjustable andremovable barrier extension 206 may be configured with thebarrier 140. Thebarrier extension 206 may be used to provide additional product security by creating a larger barrier to prevent or limit access to the product on the shelf. Thebarrier extension 206 may be selectively mounted to thebarrier 140 through the use of mountingholes 208 and fasteners 210. As shown in the figures, several mountingholes 208 can be located on either thebarrier 140 or thebarrier extension 206 or both. These mounting holes can be aligned vertically or non-vertically. The several mountingholes 208 permit thebarrier extension 206 to be adjusted relative to thebarrier 140 to permit thebarrier extension 206 to extend a desired distance, depending on the application, the desired level of security, or the placement of the shelves. Other techniques for mounting or attaching thebarrier extension 206 to thebarrier 140 are possible with the invention, including techniques using other types of fasteners or adhesives. - The
barrier extension 206 can define numerous shapes and configurations depending on the desired application and level of product securement. For example, thebarrier extension 206 can be configured to extend across one row of product, one facing, or more than one row or facing. Thebarrier extension 206 may also be made of a clear, transparent, or semi-transparent material to permit or prevent the product on the shelf to be visible to a consumer or stock person. Thebarrier extension 206 may also include a handle similar to thehandle 202 described above. - The
barrier extension 206 may include a reinforcingrim 212 that provides additional structural integrity and rigidity to thebarrier extension 206 to further provide additional product security. The reinforcingrim 212 may also be equipped or configured with a handle 214. If thebarrier extension 206 is configured with a locking mechanism as described herein, or configured to be in a locked position, the reinforcingrim 212 will assist in preventing a potential thief from bending or breaking thebarrier extension 206 and thus giving the thief access to the product that is intended to be locked and secured on the shelf. - A locking mechanism may be further added to the
barrier 140 to further hinder or prevent access to the product on the shelf. In an exemplary embodiment, as shown inFIG. 10 , acylinder lock 200 may be used to secure and lock thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 in a closed position to prevent access to the product. Thelock 200 may be mounted to thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206, through a opening or hole 216 (FIG. 14 ), and may be configured to mount through theopenings 120 in theretaining wall 116. - In one embodiment, the
lock 200 may engage an arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 configured in or formed with the retainingwall 116. The arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 will further secure thelock 200 to theretaining wall 116 by permitting the locking tab of thecylindrical lock 200 to more securely seat on, or be held in place relative to, the retainingwall 116. With the use of a lock, such aslock 200, a consumer or store personnel will need to use a key, special tool, or access card to open the lock prior to moving or lifting thebarrier 140. - In one embodiment, the
lock 200 may engage an arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 configured in or formed with the retainingwall 116. The arcuate-shaped wall portion 117 will further secure thelock 200 to theretaining wall 116 by permitting the locking tab of thecylindrical lock 200 to more securely seat on, or be held in place relative to, the retainingwall 116. With the use of a lock, such aslock 200, a consumer or store personnel will need to use a key, special tool, or access card to open the lock prior to moving or lifting thebarrier 140. - Referring to
FIGS. 18-20 , another exemplary lock mechanism is depicted. Alock 280 may be a key-locked rotating oval-shaped lock. Thelock 280 is secured to theretaining wall 116 through ahole 282 formed in theretaining wall 116. More specifically, and referring toFIG. 20 , thelock 280 includes an anchoring bolt that defines abolt head 284. Thebolt head 284 and washer, if used, will secure thelock 280 to theretaining wall 116. As can be seen inFIG. 20 ,numerous holes 282 may be positioned along the retainingwall 116 to provide flexibility in the location and placement of thelock 280, as well as providing for the use ofnumerous locks 280. Thelock 280 also can includeflanges 290, 292 that interact with retainingwall 116. - Referring to
FIGS. 18 and 19 , thebarrier 140, orbarrier extension 206 if used, defines an oval-shapedopening 286. Similar to the flexibility provided by thenumerous holes 282,numerous openings 286 may be placed along thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 to provide the same flexibility. As shown inFIG. 18 , when thelock 280 is in a locked position, theopening 286 prevents thelock 280 from passing through theopening 286. As illustrated byFIG. 19 , when thelock 280 is moved to an unlocked position through the use of a key 288, the oval-shapedlock 280 will to pass through the oval-shapedopening 286 thus permitting the opening of thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206. With the use of thelock 280 and its mounting to theretaining wall 116, as opposed to a lock mounted on thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 and extending into the shelf, there will be no interference with product on the shelf, as may sometimes occur with the barrier-mounted locks. In addition, thelock 280 can, but need not, interact with the channels or rails 118, 124 and can leave these channels or rails substantially free to receive other objects such as a retaining wall or tab 122. As can be appreciated, the invention is not limited to the depicted oval-shape lock 280 andopening 286 as well as the illustrated placement of the lock and opening; rather, many various shaped keyed or keyless locks may be used with similarly shaped openings formed in the barrier or barrier extension and placed in numerous locations and still achieve the benefits of the invention. - Alternatively,
FIGS. 21-24 depict an additional locking mechanism. Alock plate 302 can extend through an opening or slot 304 formed in theretaining wall 116 and through an opening 306 formed in thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206. Thelock plate 302 is configured to receive the padlock 300. One or more of the openings orslots 304 may be formed in theretaining wall 116 at various positions along the retaining wall including the depicted positions between the holes oropenings 120 in theretaining wall 116. The openings orslots 304 are configured to receive thelock plate 302 and to secure thelock plate 302 onto the retainingwall 116, as described below. While the openings orslots 304 are depicted as vertical slots, other shapes and configurations of the openings orslots 304 are possible with the invention. Padlock 300 may be used to secure and lock thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 in a closed position to prevent access to the product. The padlock 300 may be any known keyed or keyless padlock and may be mounted to thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 through the use of amovable lock plate 302. - As can be appreciated, depending on the desired level of security, one or
more lock plates 302 may be used to secure and lock thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 in a closed position to prevent access to the product. Thelock plates 302 are movable in that they can be positioned within any of the openings orslots 304 along the retainingwall 116. Being movable also permits thebarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206 to be made in various widths to protect only those products on the shelf that must be protected. In addition, thelock plate 302 need not interact with the channels or rails 118, 124 and can leave these channels or rails substantially free to receive other objects such as a retaining wall or tab 122. - In an exemplary embodiment, the
lock plate 302 may be made of any suitable metal or plastic material and may define anose 310 that will extend through the retainingwall 116 andbarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206, if used. Thenose 310 further defines an opening orhole 312 for receiving the padlock 300, as illustrated byFIG. 21 . Thenose 310 also defines a notch or cut-away 314 that, when assembled, will seat on the bottom edge of the opening orslot 304, as shown inFIG. 24 . Once in this position, the notch or cut-away 314 will prevent thelock plate 302 from being slid or pushed back out of theslot 304 and behind theretaining wall 116. - The
nose 310 is connected to or formed with aback plate 316. Theback plate 316 includes legs or retainingmembers 318 that, when assembled, will be positioned behind theretaining wall 116 and assist in holding thelock plate 302 on theretaining wall 116. Theback plate 316 and retainingmembers 318 may take on numerous configurations that aid in holding thelock plate 302 to theretaining wall 116. Thelock plate 302 may be configured to not only extend through the retainingwall 116 andbarrier 140 orbarrier extension 206, it may also extend through and be used with the tab 122. - One skilled in the art will appreciate that any known locking mechanism can be used with the invention, including a cable lock that may be mounted with the hole 204 (
FIG. 13 ), and any known key, special tool, access card, electronic, magnetic or wireless means (for keyless locking mechanisms) can be used to open the locking mechanism. - As depicted in
FIG. 8 , an exemplary embodiment of the invention incorporates a system that causes an alert to store or security personnel that a potential theft situation exists. In one embodiment, lifting or moving thebarrier 140 activates a mechanical or electronic alert device 142, generally depicted in the figures, that provides a signal, such as an audible, inaudible, infrared, radio-frequency, cellular, ultrasonic or electronic signal (including digital and analog signals), or a combination of these signals. This alert signal may be a sound, tone or voice annunciation that alerts store or security personnel that thebarrier 140 has been opened or has been opened for an unusually long period of time and potentially represents a theft situation. The alert device 142 also may send an electronic or other signal to play a voice message via the store paging system, to activate a local or remote strobe or annunciator light, or to send a signal to a receiver, such as a store computer, a pager, cellular device, or other portable device carried by store or security personnel. The alert device 142 may also activate a security video camera to monitor the particular area or vicinity, or activate a monitor that is placed in the area or vicinity which would show the camera image to the consumers and potential thief, or transmit the camera image to security or store management via a web connection, cellular telephone, personal data assistant, or any other signal receiving device. The alert device 142 also may activate an advertisement, informational announcement or other statement or display that is provided through voice, video or video and voice. This advertisement, announcement or statement can be directed to the particular product or product type associated with product behind the barrier that activates the alert device. The alert device can be located such that barriers of a width of no more than one product facing will activate the alert device when lifted. - As used herein, the term “alert device” is meant to include any device or component that may provide an alert, warning and/or signal concerning a condition, situation, and/or circumstance. The alert device 142 may be hard-wired to the store's security system or may be a wireless system. Wireless systems, if used, provide increased flexibility in installation and can be readily installed in existing shelves without the need to install wires for either power or communication. In addition, the use of a wireless system allows for the gradual installation of a system. For example, items of high value (and therefore suffering from an increased likelihood of being stolen) or items that tend to have significant variations in customer demand can be monitored first. With a wireless system, the alert signal may be sent to not only the store's security system or computer, but also any portable device or receiver, such as a controller, personal data assistant, pager or cellular telephone that may be carried by store personnel or security. Also with the wireless or wired system, the store's computer can process further the alert signal to determine whether a theft situation exists and can generate reports which can be analyzed to fine tune product placement, placement of cameras, alert devices, sensors, and so forth, as well as fine tune the delays and actions initiated by potential theft situations. As understood by those skilled in the art the store's computer can be configured with the network server and can be accessible remotely through the world-wide web or other network, and can be controlled remotely through the world-wide web or other network.
- In an exemplary embodiment, the alert device 142 is positioned on the
shelf 104, either underneath, as depicted inFIG. 8 , or on top of the shelf. Existing mounting holes on the standard dealer shelf may be used to secure the alert device to the shelf. The alert device 142 may be positioned near to or adjacent to thebarrier 140. The alert device 142 may be operatively connected to thebarrier 140 through numerous techniques. In one embodiment, the alert device 142 includes a switch 144, such as a push-button switch, that will activate when thebarrier 140 is moved or opened. That is, as thebarrier 140 moves and comes in contact with the switch 144, either directly or through the use of an activator plate 145, the switch 144 is activated. Alternatively, in a closed-barrier position, the switch 144 is pressed, as thebarrier 140 moves to an open position thebarrier 140 moves away from the switch 144, thereby releasing the switch 144 and thus activating the alert device 142. - The alert device 142 may be operatively connected or coupled to the barrier to detect movement of the barrier through other methods or techniques. For instance, a motion sensor or similar sensory devices, such as a light-emitting diode sensor assembly, may be used to detect movement of the barrier and communicate that information to the alert device 142. The sensor may be mounted in a variety of locations including on the barrier itself or next to the barrier to detect barrier movement. Alternatively, a magnetic switch may be incorporated to detect movement of the barrier.
- The alert device 142 may include sensory components and time-delay features that will calculate how long the
barrier 140 has been moved or opened. Upon reaching a predetermined time period, in other words, as thebarrier 140 has been moved or opened for a certain duration, the alert device 142 will send a signal, such as the above-mentioned signals, to alert the store personnel, security and/or the consumer that thebarrier 140 has been opened or moved for a long period of time, thereby indicating a potential theft situation. In an exemplary embodiment, upon the passing of the predetermined time period, the alert device 142 may send an audio alert signal, including a signal different from a previous audio alert signal, that would draw attention to the vicinity. The alert device 142 can therefore be designed to provide its alert for a fixed period of time before becoming silent. - In another embodiment of the alert device 142, the audio alert signal is adjustable to provide a variety of alert tones of varying frequencies, or to announce that the
barrier 140 has been opened or moved for too long and that the consumer needs to close thebarrier 140, or to send a silent alarm to the store and/or security personnel. Different signals or frequencies can be used as the length of time in which the barrier has been opened or moved increases. Numerous combinations of alert signals are possible with the alert device 142 depending on the desired level of security. The alert signal is adjustable and numerous combinations of signals may be used to provide the desired signal level and thus security level, yet avoid turning away legitimate consumers from selecting and purchasing the product. That is, for example, the alert device 142 can be programmed to provide an alert signal that will draw the attention of surrounding shoppers or store/security personnel, yet short enough to limit aggravation of the legitimate consumers or stock person. - Also, in another embodiment, a two-tiered response could be implemented. For example, if the
barrier 140 is moved, a signal could be transmitted directly to the security camera, or via the store computer or both. In addition, an inaudible notification could be provided directly to security personnel. If thebarrier 140 remains open or moved for a set period of time, more clearly indicating a potential theft, an additional audible alarm and flashing lights could also be activated, or any other alarm. Thus, the response could be configured to more carefully match the situation. - Referring to
FIG. 15 , in an exemplary embodiment, a security video camera 260 may be placed in the vicinity of product that are high risk theft items, or other product of concern. As shown inFIG. 16 , a monitor 262 also may be placed in the vicinity of the high risk product. The monitor 262 may be used to show the security camera image to consumers and any potential thief. Thus, a consumer or potential thief that removes product from theshelf 104 of thedisplay system 100 may realize that their actions are being watched by a camera and potentially recorded. - As can be appreciated, the position of the potential theft relative to the security camera 260 would be beneficial to provide an instruction to the security camera to focus on a particular position. This positional information could be generated by a number of methods, including providing a store computer with the security camera coordinate system for the security camera. The location of the alert device 142 relative to the security camera could be determined during setup and during a potential theft situation; the location of the alert device 142 could be used to direct the focus of the security camera. Alternatively, the security camera could be configured to focus in several positions, such as three points along an aisle, and the store computer could indicate which position was the most appropriate for the particular situation. One skilled in the art will appreciate that the described methods are illustrative because of the numerous methods of controlling the security camera that exist.
- In addition to the value of such system in loss prevention, the monitor can show video in the form of advertising or consumer information. As illustrated by
FIG. 17 , the monitor 262 can switch between the advertising or consumer information and the camera image through the use of a video switch 264. This switching activity can occur on a periodic basis, such as every 30 seconds, or can occur when predetermined conditions are met, such as the lifting of thebarrier 140, the removal of product, the movement of a pusher, or input from a proximity sensor that a consumer has entered or approaches the area. By playing the video segment, the device not only reduces loss, but becomes a source of revenue when advertisers are charged to place their message on the system. - A secondary video source for the monitor on which advertising, consumer information or other content is shown can be a video player 266 such as a video cassette recorder, compact disk-video player, solid state digital video player, direct video, audio feed or other video sources. With respect to the switch 264, the switching action between the camera image and advertising or other content can be effected by a hardware timer or a small microcontroller. In one embodiment, the secondary video source can contain a multitude of short video segments which are randomly or non-randomly selected by the timer or microcontroller. The camera 260 may be a small, stand-alone type, not connected to any part of an existing security system, or it may be any typical store security camera existing in the store's security network. The monitor 262 may be a small flat, color, LCD type monitor and can be placed at numerous locations on or near the
shelf 104. For instance, the monitor may be placed in overhead signage above the merchandised product or it can be attached to theshelf 104 edge. In some applications, a larger monitor, such as a CRT-type, plasma, LCD or projection monitor can be used. A preferred solid-state digital video player may comprise the secondary video source. The source may be housed in the same enclosure as the monitor or may be located remotely from the monitor. - Referring back to
FIGS. 4 and 5 , in another exemplary embodiment, theshelf 104 on which the product rests may be a “pull-out” shelf. The “pull-out” shelf allows store associates or personnel access to the product to restock the shelf but prevents a thief from obtaining such access. The pull-out shelf allows easy access to all products on the shelf. This function, however, requires that the shelf not be movable by the consumer or thief and therefore the pull-out function must be protected by a key-lock, special tool, or other locking mechanism. In this embodiment, theproduct dividers 110 may be designed to be at least equal to the height of the tallest product package on the shelf. As theshelf 104 is pulled out, the product lane or dividers may cause thebarrier 140 to rise. If the height of thedividers 110 is lower than the tallest product package, pushing the shelf back in may cause thebarrier 140 to catch on the product packages and make it more difficult to return to its closed position. Additionally, pulling out theshelf 104 will raise thebarrier 140 which may activate an annunciator or signal generator, as explained above. - Referring to
FIG. 9 , in an exemplary embodiment, a barrier placed on atop-most shelf 104 may include a lock-box 108 that may be used for storage of overstock product oradditional display system 100 components. In an embodiment in which thetop-most shelf 104 is a pull-out type, theshelf 104 will pull out while the horizontal barrier above it remains in place, allowing product to be easily accessed. As indicated above, the lock-box 108 may also be mounted to thevertical uprights 102, through known mounting techniques, and may be mounted at any location on thedisplay system 100. The lock-box 108 may use any known locking mechanism that permits key or key-less entry to the lock-box 108. One skilled in the art will appreciate that other security components may be mounted to the lock-box 108 including the security camera, monitor, and alert device 142, to name a few. - In an embodiment, a stationary shroud 180 may placed toward the top of the
product display system 100. The shroud 180 provides security and graphic placement, and product may be stored within it. The shroud 180 provides security in that it functions as a top wall or barrier preventing access to the product from a point above the product. The shroud 180 may mount on or to an existing shelf. The shroud 180 may be fixed or adjustable. With an adjustable shroud, the shroud can be positioned at numerous locations on the product display system. In addition, the shroud 180 can be a pull-out shroud functioning in manner similar to the exemplary pull-outshelf 104 described above. Moreover, the shroud 180 can also serve as a shelf to hold product. In other words, theproduct display system 100 could include multiple shrouds 180 that function as shelves to hold or display product. Also, the shroud can be configured to mount thebarriers lock box 108 having alockable door 109, as shown inFIG. 9 , may be placed on the shroud 180 for additional product storage and graphic placement. - The
product display system 100 of the invention offers various levels of securement and theft protection. Each level described herein can be used separately and various or all levels can be used in conjunction with each other. Each level can also be added to or adapted with existing shelf systems or be provided as a stand alone system. The divider or retainingwalls 110 provide securement. Thefront retaining wall 116 or “fence” provides securement, with or without the retainingtabs 120. The barriers andaccess doors retaining wall 116 provides securement. The close positioning of theshelf 104 over the product located on the shelf below provides securement. The audible or other signal that is generated by the alert device 142 when thebarrier 140 has been open for a set period of time provides securement. The security camera and video and display devices provide securement. Each of these separable aspects of an embodiment of the invention can be used on its own in a retail setting, or can be used in conjunction with other aspects of the embodiment. Each separable aspect can be added to existing shelving or display systems to effectively retrofit and add one or more levels of security to such existing systems. - One embodiment of the invention features various levels of theft deterrent. One level assists in preventing sweeping of products. Pushers 126,
dividers 110, and retainingwalls 116 are coupled with ashelf 104 orbarrier 130, or both, above the product to provide securement to the product. The pushers, dividers, retaining walls, shelf, and barrier allow approximately one, two or three packages to be removed through an opening at one time from a facing of the display system. Second retaining walls or tabs 122 may be used to provide individual securement for specific rows of product. Thefront wall 116 and tabs 122 may also include holes or openings that extend therethrough that would require the consumer to push on the product through the holes or openings in order to remove the product from the shelf. - A second level of securement incorporates all of the features of first level with the addition of a
barrier 140 or access door. To access the product, the consumer must utilize two hands, one to lift or slide thebarrier 140 and the other to remove the product, thus adding a second layer of deterrent to the system. - A third level of securement builds upon the features of the first and second levels with the addition of a theft-warning notification device, such as an alert device 142, or other signal transmission device. The alert notification or signal transmission is activated if the
barrier 140 or access door is open a predetermined amount of time. This delay can be adjusted to any duration or eliminated. The notification provides an audible, inaudible, infrared, radio-frequency, electronic, or cellular signal that notifies consumers and/or store and security personnel that thebarrier 140 has been open for a particular period of time. The signal transmission can send a signal to a store computer, store personnel or a security camera or monitor. The signal can alert the store computer or personnel that thebarrier 140 or access door has been opened for a particular period of time and can activate the security camera and monitor to show the thief an image of himself or herself in front of the product. This image can be recorded. Additional alert notifications or signal transmissions can be activated as the amount of time the barrier or access door is open increases. - An additional level of deterrence of theft by consumers or store personnel is the use of a locking mechanism on the
shelf 104 to limit unauthorized personnel from pulling out the shelf. The system can require the use of a key or an uncommonly or commonly shaped instrument to be inserted into a concealed access slot in the front or underside of the shelf. This method is designed to require someone with specific knowledge of the shelf operation to disengage the lock. In an embodiment, thebarrier 140 or access door on theshelf 104 can be automatically raised for restocking purposes when the shelf is pulled out, then re-engaged once the shelf has been returned to the closed position. In this application, an audio alert may be incorporated that indicates that the shelf is being restocked with product. - In addition, in an embodiment, a stationary shroud 180 may be placed toward the top of the product display and management system. The shroud provides security by inhibiting access to the product from above the product. Also, a lock box can be placed anywhere on the system to store additional product that will be secured by a key lock or some other locking mechanism.
- In one embodiment of the present invention, various aspects of the invention are added to portions of existing shelves. In some environments, there are only one, two or a few potential high-theft products among a display of many products. Aspects of the present invention can be added solely to the portion of a shelf management and display system with respect to those high-theft products. For example, a
barrier 140 could be placed solely over those products. In addition, side walls could be placed to cover one or more of the sides of the products to further deter sweeping or other theft. A front barrier, a locking mechanism or other aspects of the invention described herein could be used solely with the high-theft products or other highly relevant products in a display and not used with other products in the same display. In one embodiment, a particular set of relevant products can be effectively segregated from the other products within the same display. This particular set of relevant products can be subject to additional security aspects described herein that are not used with the remaining products in the display. - Referring to
FIGS. 28-29 , there is depicted anadjustable power bar 400 that may be selectively mounted to theback wall 106. Thepower bar 400 will provide electrical power to various components mounted to the shelves, including any video monitors, security cameras, lighting, illuminated signage, overhead header lights, radios, stereos, or any other components that may be mounted to a shelf or the product display and require electrical power. As illustrated by the Figures, thepower bar 400 is selectively adjustable between several positions to accommodate shelf height changes or adjustments without causing obstruction with the mounting or adjustment of the shelf. - Conventionally, power outlets were mounted to the shelf and were not easily movable. In fact, significant force was required to unlock the power outlets from the track on which they were mounted to then move the power outlets. In other known applications, the power outlets were mounted to conductive tracks, similar to track-lighting tracks which included embedded power tracks. With those track-type systems, the power outlets needed to be placed at correct locations and snap-fit into position. Once installed, the power outlets were not slidable.
- The
power bar 400 of the invention solves these problems and other known problems by providing a power source for a product display that is easily mountable to the display, such as theback wall 106, and is easily adjustable to accommodate changes made to the positions of the shelves. Thepower bar 400 includes an elongated body 402 that may be attached to theback wall 106 of the display. As illustrated, thepower bar 400 may be mounted in a vertical manner and the elongated body 402 may extend the entire height of the product display or alternatively less than the entire height of the product display. Thepower bar 400 may be slidably moved (as indicated by direction arrow 401) a sufficient distance to avoid interference with the product shelf that may be placed at approximately the same vertical height, or with the repositioning of the mounted product shelf. Thepower bar 400 includes one ormore power outlets 404 that may be configured at numerous positions on thepower bar 400. Once in the desired position, a fastener, not shown, may be positioned through an adjustment slot 406 to secure thepower bar 400 to theback wall 106 at the desired height. The adjustment slot 406 is elongated to permit further adjustment of thepower bar 400. - The elongated body 402 defines an elongated hollow cavity 408 through which may pass conducting
wires 410 that are used to supply the power to thepower bar outlets 404. The elongated body 402 may also include a recessed channel 412 formed in the body 402 and along each side of the body 402. The channel 412 may be used as a receptor for receiving and aligning thepower bar 400 onto the body 402. Thepower bar 400 may fit on or within the channel 412 in a tongue-and-groove manner, or any other suitable mounting connection that permits slidable movement of one component relative to another. Once installed, thepower bar 400 will slide relative to the body 402 in or on the channel 412. -
FIGS. 34-59 illustrate an embodiment of a box-shelf that may be secured directly to an upright. Thus, as depicted, the box-shelf may be provided as a complete unit that provides theft-prevention benefits as discussed above while allowing for more straightforward installation in a retail location. As can be appreciated, in an embodiment the box-shelf may be configured to be self-contained so as to eliminate the need for a support shelf. - Looking first at
FIGS. 34-36 , a box-shelf 3405 includes a top 3420 and twosides 3422 that can be connected together to form part of ahousing 3408. A recessedportion 3421 is provided so that in the event that the box-shelf 3405 is mounted under a shelf, the recessedportion 3421 will aid in ensuring there is no interference with the brackets that support the shelf or other structure that may extend downward (not shown). One or more shelf supports 3430 are mounted to thebox shelf 3405 so as to enable thebox shelf 3405 to be mounted to a vertical support (not shown) in a traditional manner. - A
slidable shelf 3410 is mounted to one ormore tracks 3416, which can be supported at least in part by thesides 3422. As depicted, theslidable shelf 3410 can include asupport surface 3412 that supports a divider 3418 (which may be a pusher or a simple divider) and includes arail 3445 mounted to the front of theshelf 3410. The rail in turn supports aretainer 3414. - As depicted, a
door 3424 with one ormore handles 3426 can be mounted to the top 3420 viahinge system 4010 and is coupled to acontrol unit 3515 that may be configured to produce an audible tone (immediately or after some predetermined delay) when the door is opened and may further be configured to provide a signal to a remote device so as to trigger video capture or security personal. -
Slidable shelf 3410 translates via atrack 3416 when lockingfeature 3525 is actuated. As can be appreciated, to translate theslidable shelf 3410, thedoor 3424 needs to be opened and in an embodiment, as depicted, the door may open up to 90 degrees. As can be appreciated, therail 3445 can also be mounted on the top 3420 of thebox shelf 3405. - It should be noted that details such as discussed above with respect to
FIGS. 1-33 may also be incorporated into the embodiment depicted inFIGS. 34-59 , where appropriate. Thus, where desirable and/or convenient, the above details may be incorporated. -
FIGS. 37a-37b show thelocking feature 3525 in a locked or blocking position and an opening and non-blocking position. In an embodiment, an opening in thelip 3547 allows a key to be inserted so as to translate thelocking feature 3525 from the locked to the open position. Thus, as can now be appreciated, thelocking feature 3525 is shown in both the blocked and open position in a number of the Figures. - As depicted in
FIG. 38 , one or more box shelves 34-5 may be mounted on top of each other. In such a configuration, apath 3810 can allow the insertion of a key (not shown) to actuate thelocking feature 3525. - As can be appreciated from
FIG. 39 , thedoor 3424 can be pivotally mounted to support 3925. Furthermore, ahat channel 3915 can be provided for additional strength and rigidity of thebox shelf 3405. Thehat channel 3915 may also be used to support thelocking feature 3525 and/or one ormore tracks 3416. As depicted, two shelf supports 3430 (sometimes referred to as brackets) are mounted to arear panel 3940 and include slots so as to allow the box shelf to be mounted to vertical supports in an adjustable manner even if the position of the vertical supports include some degree of tolerance stack-up. The shelf supports 3430 can be connected to one or more vertical rails (not shown) of a shelving structure. -
FIGS. 40-47 illustrate additional details of the depicted embodiment of the box shelf. It should be noted that the box-shelf may be constructed out of known materials, such as powder coated 18 gauge steel or some other appropriate material.FIG. 48 illustrates an embodiment of thesupport surface 3412 and includes reference to cross-sections J-J and P-P. As can be appreciated fromFIGS. 49-51 , thelip 3547 can include ablocking lip 4910 in the center of the shelf (or in some other location aligned with the locking feature 3525) but the blocking lip may not be required in other locations, thus allowing (but not requiring) a reduction in the amount of material used to make thesupport surface 3412. -
FIGS. 52-54 illustrate details one embodiment of thelocking feature 3525.FIG. 52 shows thehinge plate 5215 both in a partially exploded view and in an installed position. As depicted, thehinge plate 5215 is mounted to hingebase plate 5225 by afastener 5230 that couples to anut 5240. Abiasing element 5235 directs thehinge plate 5215 toward a first or locked position. Thus,hinge plate 5215 a is a locked position and hingeplate 5215 b is an open position. As can be appreciated, however, numerous other methods of mounting thehinge plate 5215 to thehinge base plate 5235 are possible. -
FIGS. 54-59 illustrate additional details regarding embodiments of thelocking feature 3525,shelf support 3430 and other potential elements of thebox shelf 3405. In addition,FIG. 59 depicts section H-H, from whichFIG. 46 is taken. It should be noted that any dimensional references are merely exemplary and are not intended to reflect any limitations to the present invention unless otherwise noted. -
FIGS. 60-73 illustrate another aspect of the invention, namely a low profile shelf system that improves the merchandising of product. The low profile shelf system improves product merchandising by creating more spacing between shelves to accommodate larger product. In some stores, there are large product sections wherein product management systems, such as those described above, are not the most ideal systems to use because there is not sufficient height (i.e., spacing) between shelves to add such a system. In these instances, the product is merchandised so tightly between shelves that adding a product management system, such as those described above, raises the product such that it may interfere with the shelf above. Occasionally, retailers are not willing to adjust the shelves to incorporate a product management system because such shelf adjustments typically must be done in fixed increments (e.g., one inch increments), and moving shelves by such increments can sometimes lead to the undesirable eliminating of a shelf, such as the top shelf. - As depicted in
FIGS. 60-73 , the invention solves this problem by using low-profile shelf supports 600. Each low-profile shelf support 600 may define aback portion 602 and afront portion 604. Theback portion 602 may include afastening plate 606 attached thereto (FIG. 72 ), eachfastening plate 606 having at least onehook formation 610 that can be inserted into a slotted upright (not shown). Thefastening plate 606 may be fastened to the shelf support through the use offasteners 623. Alternatively, theback portion 602 may form the at least one hook formation 610 (FIG. 60 ). As shown inFIG. 60 , theback portion 602 of theshelf support 600 may have a thickness that is substantially greater than the thickness of the front portion, resulting in thefront portion 604 having a significantly lower profile than the back portion of theshelf support 600. This reduced profile of the front portion results in greater clearance between product shelves to accommodate larger product and/or the installation of the product management systems described herein. In one embodiment, the thickness of theback portion 602 may be 75% greater than the thickness of thefront portion 604. Other thicknesses of the front and back portions are possible to create the desired low profile shelf support configuration. - Referring to
FIGS. 61 and 73 , the shelf supports 600 may be positioned beneath and secured to ashelf 614. Apusher system 616 may be mounted to theshelf 614. The pusher system may include apusher track 618 and apusher 620. Any of the pusher systems described herein may be used with the low profile shelf supports 600. Additionally, aproduct divider 625 may be mounted to theshelf 614 or made part of thepusher system 616, as described herein. - Referring to
FIGS. 60, 63 and 64 , apivotable barrier 640 and a frontproduct retaining wall 642 may be mounted to afront rail 644, which may be mounted to the front of theshelf 614. Thefront rail 644 may include one ormore channels 645 for receiving one ormore retaining walls 642 or signage identifying the products being merchandised. Thefront rail 644 may also be configured to receive thepusher system 610 in either a slidable or non-slidable manner. Thebarrier 640 may be configured similar to the barriers described herein. Similarly, the retainingwall 642 may be configured similar to the retaining walls also described herein. - Referring to
FIGS. 62-65 , analert device 650 may be mounted to theshelf 614 at or near theback portion 602. Similar to alert device 142, thealert device 650 may be used to detect when thepivotable barrier 640 is moved or opened and send an appropriate alert signal, as illustrated above. With this embodiment, thealert device 650 may include aswitch 652 that is activated by alinkage 654 that operatively contacts the pivotable barrier 640 (FIG. 64 ). Thelinkage 654 may be a metal or plastic rod or flat stock of a suitable material. With this embodiment, thebarrier 640 may include a cam-shapedend 641 mountable to thefront rail 644, as shown inFIG. 64 , the cam-shapedend 641 configured to contact and cause movement of thelinkage 654 when thebarrier 640 pivots. Thelinkage 654 in turn may contact theswitch 652 of the alert device 650 (as shown inFIG. 65 ) to activate thealert device 650, which will send or emit the desired alert signal. Alinkage cover 662 may be mounted over thelinkage 654 to cover and protect thelinkage 654. - Referring to
FIGS. 66-69 , a security box-shelf 670 may be secured to the low-profile shelf support 600 (or to the vertical uprights) and over thepusher system 610. The box-shelf 670 may be provided as a complete unit that provides theft-prevention benefits as discussed above and may be configured to be self-contained so as to eliminate the need for a support shelf. The box-shelf 670 may include a top 672 that may be made of clear material to permit products to be seen in the box-shelf 670. The box-shelf 670 may also include twosides 674 and aback wall 676 that may be joined together to form the box-shelf 670. Afront security rail 678 may be mounted to the top 672 (as shown inFIG. 69 ). Thesecurity rail 678 may also be configured to receive apivotable barrier 640. Thebarrier 640 may be similar to the barriers described above and may be opened to permit access to the products merchandised within the box-shelf 670. An alert device may also be operatively coupled to thebarrier 640. - Referring to
FIGS. 70-71 ,optional signage 690 may be mounted to theshelf 614 that is supported by the low profile shelf supports 600. One or more signage supports 692 may be used to support thesignage 690. The supports may be mounted to one or more horizontal mountingbrackets 694 for added stability of thesignage 690. - Referring to
FIGS. 72-73 , it should be understood that multiple low profile shelf supports 600 may be positioned underneath theshelf 614, depending on the size and configuration of the shelf. It should further be understood thatmultiple pusher systems 616 anddividers 625 may be positioned on theshelf 614 to merchandise multiple rows of product on the shelf. -
FIGS. 79-91 illustrate another aspect of the invention, namely amerchandise system 810. Similar to the other embodiments, themerchandise system 810 improves product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf by using various methods such as slowing the rate at which product can be pushed towards the front edge of a merchandising shelf. - Referring to
FIGS. 79-84 , in an exemplary embodiment,merchandise system 810 includes abase 812. Thebase 812 defines a generally flat planar surface that may be configured to engage with or mount onto any known shelf used in a store, as well as anyother merchandise system 810, and in any known mounting configuration and orientation. Thebase 812 defines afront edge 826, aback edge 828, afirst side edge 820, asecond side edge 822, and one ormore tracks 814. As is further illustrated, ahousing 850 can be mounted to the base 812 in any known mounting configuration and orientation. Thehousing 850 defines atop wall 852, afirst side wall 854, asecond side wall 856, and afront retaining wall 876. First andsecond side walls merchandise system 810 is placed adjacent to another likemerchandise system 810 on a shelf or stacked on top of another likemerchandise system 810, product resting on thebase 812 of eachrespective merchandise system 810 remains separated or divided. In an embodiment, onemerchandise system 810 can be stacked on top of anothermerchandise system 810 without need of a separate shelf between the two merchandise systems. - In an exemplary embodiment,
front retaining wall 876 is mounted at an angle, (for example, approximately a 45° angle) relative to thebase 812 and extends from thesecond side edge 822 tofirst side edge 820 towards thefront edge 826. Angles other than approximately 45° are possible, including angles of approximately 15°, 30°, 60° and 75°, to name a few.Front retaining wall 876 can define achannel 888 located proximate thebase 812.Channel 888 further can define adetent 886.Front retaining wall 876 andfirst side wall 854 define anopening 878 through which, as will be explained below, product can be removed by a customer or employee. In an embodiment,front retaining wall 876 does not fully extend from thesecond side edge 822 tofirst side edge 820. Alever 880 can be operatively coupled to themerchandise system 810 for ejecting product through theopening 878. In an exemplary embodiment,lever 880 is slidably mounted within thechannel 888. Thelever 880 can include alever biasing element 882 and alever hook 884 adapted to move product. As illustrated,lever biasing element 882 can be a coil spring positioned betweenlever hook 884 anddetent 886. The one ormore tracks 814 extend along the base 812 from theback edge 828 to thefront retaining wall 876. As shown, atrack 814 can be used with apusher 816. It should be understood that more or less than two tracks could be used with the invention, depending on the particular application. The base 812 further defines arack aperture 988 for use with arack 986 as will be discussed below. - Referring to
FIGS. 88 and 89 , in an exemplary embodiment, the one ormore tracks 814 extend longitudinally along the length of thebase 812 and define at least onerail 830 and an elongated aperture orchannel 832 in thebase 812. Theaperture 832 andrail 830 are sized and shaped to receive and mount a mating element of thepusher 816. Thepusher 816 is slidably mounted to the base 812 such that thepusher 816 does not lift out of thetrack 814. The present invention contemplates the use of other shapes of rails and apertures to mount thepusher 816 to thebase 812. Other pusher mounting techniques are possible with the invention. - The
pusher 816 also contains at least onepusher urging element 860 used to urge thepusher 816 toward the front of the shelf. Thepusher urging element 860 may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring. The present invention may use one or morepusher urging elements 860 to urge thepusher 816 depending on the desired application. Thepusher urging element 860 may be mounted to thepusher 816 and the base 812 using any known mounting technique. In the exemplary embodiment, one end of thepusher urging element 860 is secured to thebase 812 near thefront edge 826 of thebase 812, and the opposing end of thepusher urging element 860 is positioned behind thepusher 816 to urge thepusher 816 toward the front of the shelf. Further,pusher 816 includes anangled pusher face 892. In an exemplary embodiment,angled pusher face 892 is positioned such that its angle relative to thebase 812 corresponds to the angle offront retaining wall 876. It should be understood, however, thatangled pusher face 892 can be positioned at other angles and can have various dimensions and shapes. - Referring to an embodiment of the invention in
FIGS. 85 and 86 ,pusher 816 will urge the product toward thefront retaining wall 876. When product is positioned between thefront retaining wall 876 andpusher 816, only a single product can be accessed by customers or employees because theopening 878 is equal in dimension to less than the width of two products. In an embodiment, theopening 878 is no more than approximately 50% wider that the width of a single product. In another embodiment theopening 878 is roughly the width of a single product yet wide enough to allow a single product to pass through theopening 878. The positioning and dimensions ofopening 878, in combination with the positive pressure thepusher 816 places on product against thefront retaining wall 876, hampers a customer or employee's ability to remove products using solely digits (i.e., fingers) or digital force. To facilitate the removal of a single product, when product is positioned between thefront retaining wall 876 andpusher 816, a force can be applied to lever 880 such thatlever 880 can be slidably translated. Aslever 880 is slidably translated,lever hook 884 engages the most forward positioned product. When the customer or employee slidably translateslever 880 to a fully extended position, the single product is partially ejected from thehousing 850 and can be easily removed by the customer or employee. Further, whenlever 880 is in a fully extended position,lever biasing element 882 is compressed betweenlever hook 884 anddetent 886. Accordingly, when a customer or employee stops applying force to thelever 880,lever biasing element 882 biases lever 880 back into its original position. - In the embodiment described below, when customers or employees reach and pull out the product available to them, the
pusher 816 is slowly urged toward thefront retaining wall 876 bypusher urging element 860 and, after a pre-determined period of time, a single product once again is positively pressured between thepusher 816 and thefront retaining wall 876 such that the product isadjacent opening 878. An attempt by a customer or employee to remove or urge the next product forward after a first product is removed is hampered because the product is positioned at an angle corresponding toangled pusher face 892 and thus, if a customer or employee attempts to tip the product forward, the product will be biased in a standing position by thesecond side wall 856. The speed at which the pusher moves can be controlled by various devices including, without limitation, a dampened gear assembly discussed below. By providing a merchandise system that urges product forward at a slow rate of speed, a customer or employee can be inhibited from removing more than one product at a time and is assisted in removing product only once every pre-determined amount of time. - In an embodiment of the invention, to provide the desired slow rate of speed for the
pusher 816, an exemplary dampenedgear assembly 980 may be mounted to thepusher 816. The dampenedgear assembly 980 may include agear 982 and agear housing 984 that can be filled with any dampening fluid known in the art. A portion ofgear 982 is housed withingear housing 984. Arack 986 can be mounted torack aperture 988. Therack 986 defines a plurality ofteeth 990.Gear 982 ofgear assembly 980 is adapted to engage the plurality ofteeth 990 ofrack 986. In operation, when product is removed from thebase 812, andpusher 816 is urged forward bypusher urging element 860,gear assembly 980 acts to slow the rate at whichpusher 816 is urged forward. This can be accomplished because rotation ofgear 982 is regulated by the dampening fluid located ingear housing 984 which acts to resist movement of thegear 982 withingear housing 984. Again, other dampening techniques may be used with the present invention to affect the desired slow rate of movement of the pusher toward the front of the shelf. - In an embodiment,
front retaining wall 876 is made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed throughfront retaining wall 876. In an embodiment,front retaining wall 876 enables advertisements or marketing materials to be placed onfront retaining wall 876.Base 812 also can include a display area 999 (seeFIG. 79 ) for advertising or marketing material as well as product information such as product pricing information. Becausedisplay area 999 can include product information,merchandise system 810 can be, as was discussed above, stacked on top of another likemerchandise system 810 without the use of shelves. - In an embodiment, a locking device (not shown) can be used to prevent the removal of product. Such locking device may include a rotatable barrier, a door, or a locking clip. The locking device, for instance, could prevent product from fitting through
opening 878 such that when themerchandise system 810 is not in use, neither employees nor customers can access the product. - It should be understood that the
merchandise system 810 can be altered such thatfirst side wall 854 andsecond side wall 856 are reversed and thus, opening 878 is on the opposite side. As can be understood by one in the art, in this embodiment, theangled pusher face 892,front retaining wall 876, and thelever 880, among other things, are also reversed. - Referring to
FIGS. 90 and 91 , in another embodiment, ahousing 950 defines atop wall 952, afirst side wall 954, and an opposing second side wall. A front edge of thebase 812 is configured to mount to or on arail 924 in any known manner. As discussed above, thebase 812 may include a rack and rack aperture wherein the rack defines a plurality of teeth 990 (as shown inFIGS. 90 and 91 ) such that a gear of a gear assembly can be adapted to engage the plurality ofteeth 990. Therail 924 includes afront retaining wall 976 to retain product that is pushed toward the rail.Front retaining wall 976 andhousing 950 define anopening 978 that is roughly equal to the width of a single product. Thepusher 916 will urge the product toward therail 924. When onemerchandise system 810 is be placed adjacent to another likemerchandise system 810 on a shelf, product can only be removed through thetop portion 979 of theopening 978. Accordingly, when product is positioned between thefront retaining wall 976 andpusher 916, only a single product can be accessed by customers or employees. It will be further understood that a device, such as a lever trigger (not shown), may be used to facilitate a customer or employee to partially or fully eject product through thetop portion 979 of theopening 978. -
FIGS. 92A-101C illustrate another aspect of the invention, namely amerchandise system 1010. Similar to the other embodiments, themerchandise system 1010 improves product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf by using various methods such as an electronic lock-out mechanism which locks the merchandising shelf and multiple shelves when too many products are removed at one time. Themerchandise system 1010 may generally include abase 1012 andhousing 1050, a door assembly ordoor 1020, a locking assembly, and anelectronic control unit 1080. - Referring to
FIG. 92A , in an exemplary embodiment,merchandise system 1010 includes abase 1012. Thebase 1012 defines a generally flat planar surface that may be configured to engage with or mount onto any known shelf used in a store, as well as anyother merchandise system 1010, and in any known mounting configuration and orientation. Thebase 1012 defines afront edge 1016, a back edge 1017, afirst side edge 1018, a second side edge 1019, and one ormore tracks 1014. Additionally, thebase 1012 may include aratchet shaft slot 1015. Theratchet shaft slot 1015 may be configured to accept theratchet shaft 1066 as will be described below. Theratchet shaft slot 1015 may extend longitudinally along the length of thebase 1012. Theratchet shaft slot 1015 is sized and shaped to receive and mount theratchet shaft 1066. - As is further illustrated in
FIG. 92A , ahousing 1050 can be mounted to thebase 1012 in any known mounting configuration and orientation. Thehousing 1050 defines a top wall 1052, a first side wall 1054, and a second side wall 1056. Thehousing 1050 may also include a rear retaining wall (not shown in the figures). The first and second side walls 1054 and 1056, respectively, can be used such that when more than onemerchandise system 1010 is placed adjacent to another likemerchandise system 1010 on a shelf or stacked on top of another likemerchandise system 1010, product resting on thebase 1012 of eachrespective merchandise system 1010 remains separated or divided. In an embodiment, onemerchandise system 1010 can be stacked on top of anothermerchandise system 1010 without need of a separate shelf between the two merchandise systems. - As shown in
FIG. 92A , the one ormore tracks 1014 may extend along the base 1012 from theback edge 1028 to thedoor 1020. As shown, atrack 1014 can be used with apusher 1040. It should be understood that more or less than two tracks could be used with the invention, depending on the particular application. - As illustrated in
FIG. 92A , the one ormore tracks 1014 extend longitudinally along the length of thebase 1012 and may define at least one rail and/or an elongated aperture or channel in thebase 1012. The track is sized and shaped to receive and mount a mating element of thepusher 1040. Thepusher 1040 may be slidably mounted to thebase 1012 such that thepusher 1040 does not lift out of thetrack 1014. The present invention contemplates the use of other tracks to mount thepusher 1040 to thebase 1012. Other pusher mounting techniques are possible with the invention. - The
pusher 1040 also contains at least onepusher urging element 1044 used to urge thepusher 1040 toward the front of the shelf. Thepusher urging element 1044 may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring or a spiral torsion spring. The present invention may use one or morepusher urging elements 1044 to urge thepusher 1040 depending on the desired application. Thepusher urging element 1044 may be mounted to thepusher 1040 and thebase 1012 using any known mounting technique. In the exemplary embodiment, one end of thepusher urging element 1044 is secured to thebase 1012 near thefront edge 1016 of thebase 1012, and the opposing end of thepusher urging element 1044 is positioned behind thepusher 1040 to urge thepusher 1040 toward the front of thedoor 1020. - In an exemplary embodiment, the
merchandise system 1010 also includes a product door assembly. The door assembly may include adoor 1020, adoor pin 1030, adoor spring 1032, adoor stiffener 1034, and adoor spacer 1036. Thedoor 1020 may be designed to rotate outward while holding only one product and allow the consumer to remove only one product from themerchandise system 1010. Thedoor 1020 may be in a closed position or an open position. The operation of thedoor 1020 will be explained in more detail below. - The
door 1020, as illustrated inFIG. 92A may include ahandle 1022. Thehandle 1022 as shown inFIG. 92A is located on the upper section of thedoor 1020, such that thedoor 1020 can be opened from the top of thedoor 1020. Thehandle 1022 can be other configurations that allow a consumer to pull open thedoor 1020 from the upper section of thedoor 1020. - The
door 1020, as illustrated inFIG. 92A may also include afirst roller 1024 and asecond roller 1026. Thefirst roller 1024 may be engaged with anupper slot 1055 located on the first side wall 1054 of thehousing 1050. Thesecond roller 1026 may be engaged with alower slot 1057 located on the first side wall 1054 of thehousing 1050. Without departing from this invention, theslots 1055 1057 androllers 1024 1026 may be located on either side of thehousing 1050 and thedoor 1020 respectively. Additionally, without departing from this invention, there may be a pair ofupper slots 1055, with one slot located on the first side wall 1054 and a second slot located on the second side wall 1056; a pair oflower slots 1057, with one slot located on the first side wall 1054 and a second slot located on the second slide wall 1056; and a pair offirst rollers 1024 and a pair ofsecond rollers 1026 that may engage the corresponding slots on each of the first and second side walls 1054 1056. Therollers corresponding slot 1055 1057 to the other end of thecorresponding slot 1055 1057 during the operation of thedoor 1020. The specific operation of thedoor 1020 will be described more below. - The
door 1020 may also include anopening 1028. Theopening 1028 may be located on the consumer side of thedoor 1020 and may allow the consumer or user to press or touch the product without opening thedoor 1020. As will be described further below, theopening 1028 can be used during the restocking process. - The door assembly may also include a
door pin 1030 and adoor spring 1032, as illustrated inFIGS. 92A and 93 . Thedoor pin 1030 may be cylindrical in shape and may be any suitable material, such as plastic or metal. Thedoor spring 1032, as shown inFIG. 92A , is a spiral torsion spring or a flat coil spring that includes a first end or free end and a second end. Thedoor spring 1032 may be other suitable spring types without departing from this invention. Thedoor pin 1030 and thedoor spring 1032 engage both thedoor 1020 and thebase 1012 to attach thedoor 1020 to thebase 1012. Thedoor pin 1030 may be located at the base or bottom of thedoor 1020. The first end or free end of thedoor spring 1032 may engage thedoor pin 1030 at the base or bottom of thedoor 1020. The second end of thedoor spring 1032 may engage a portion of the locking mechanism of themerchandising system 1010, such as alocking gear 1062 as will be described below. As thedoor 1020 is opened by providing downward and outward pressure on thehandle 1022, thedoor spring 1032 is pulled away from thelocking gear 1062, thereby uncoiling thedoor spring 1032 and providing a closing bias to thedoor 1020. When pressure is released from thehandle 1022, the bias from thedoor spring 1032 causes thedoor 1020 to return to the closed position. The operation of thedoor 1020 with thedoor spring 1032 will be described more below. - Additionally, the door assembly may include a
door stiffener 1034 as shown inFIG. 92A . Thedoor stiffener 1034 may be located at the bottom of thedoor 1020. Thedoor stiffener 1034 may provide additional support, especially to the bottom of thedoor 1020 as thedoor 1020 is rotated from the closed position to the open position. - Additionally, as illustrated in
FIGS. 92A and 93 , the door assembly may include adoor spacer 1036. Thedoor spacer 1036 may be installed against the back side of thedoor 1020 to create a slot for the product when thedoor 1020 is opened. Thedoor spacer 1036 may be required so that thedoor 1020 andmerchandise system 1010 can accommodate different size packages of product. For example, awide door spacer 1036 may be installed to thedoor 1020 for smaller or thinner packages and a thin or even no door spacer 1036 may be installed to thedoor 1020 for larger or thicker packages. Depending on the size and shape of the package, thedoor spacer 1036 may take on various different shapes to accommodate the different sizes and shapes of the packages. - In an embodiment, the
door 1020, and specifically the front of thedoor 1020, is made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through thedoor 1020. Additionally, thedoor 1020 may enable advertisements or marketing materials to be placed on the front of thedoor 1020. Additionally, thebase 1012 can include a display area for advertising or marketing material as well as product information such as product pricing information. Because the display area can include product information,merchandise system 1010 can be, as discussed above, stacked on top of anothermerchandise system 1010 without the use of shelves. Additionally, instead of using adoor 1020 as described above, the merchandising system may include a button-release system that includes a button to help access or dispense product. For example, when the button is pressed, the product may be released by the use of a pusher or a slow-moving pusher to discharge the product at a bottom opening for the customer to recover. - The
merchandise system 1010 as illustrated inFIGS. 92A, 98A, and 98B may also include a locking assembly. The locking assembly may generally include alocking bar 1060, alocking gear 1062, alocking latch 1064, aratchet shaft 1066, and apusher lock 1068. - As illustrated in
FIGS. 92A, 98A, and 98B , the lockingbar 1060 is an elongated bar that extends approximately the lateral length of thebase 1012. The lockingbar 1060 may be located along the bottom or underneath thebase 1012. As illustrated inFIG. 92A , thebase 1012 includes anopening 1018A located along thefirst side 1018 and a second opening located along the second side 1019 (not shown). The lockingbar 1060 may fit within thisopening 1018A. Additionally, the lockingbar 1060 may include a lockingmember 1061 located on the side of the lockingbar 1060 as illustrated inFIG. 92A . The lockingmember 1061 may be configured to engage thelocking latch 1064 during locking operations as will be described further below. Additionally, the locking bar may include aslot 1063. Theslot 1063 may be configured to engage alocking end 1067 of theratchet shaft 1066 during locking operations as will be described further below. The lockingbar 1060 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. Additionally, the lockingbar 1060 may be configured to attached to anadjacent locking bar 1060 whenmultiple merchandise systems 1010 are configured together adjacently. - As illustrated in
FIGS. 92A, 98A, and 98B , the locking mechanism also includes thelocking gear 1062. Thelocking gear 1062 may include a set of gear teeth on one end and a rounded surface on the other end. The gear teeth of thelocking gear 1062 may be configured to engage with the lockinglatch 1064 during locking operations as will be described further below. Additionally, thedoor spring 1032 may be located on the rounded surface end to provide the bias for the door to open and close. The door opening operation will be described further below. Thelocking gear 1062 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. - As illustrated in
FIGS. 92A, 98A, and 98B , the locking mechanism also includes the lockinglatch 1064. The lockinglatch 1064 may be configured to engage with the lockingbar 1060, and specifically theslot 1063 on thelocking bar 1060. The lockinglatch 1064 may also be configured to simultaneously engage with thelocking gear 1062. The lockinglatch 1064 may engage both thelocking bar 1060 and thelocking gear 1062 during locking operations as will be described further below. The lockinglatch 1064 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. - As illustrated in
FIG. 92A , the locking mechanism also includes theratchet shaft 1066. Theratchet shaft 1066 is sized and shaped to fit within theratchet shaft slot 1015 in thebase 1012. Theratchet shaft 1066 includes one side with a plurality ofteeth 1069. The other sides of theratchet shaft 1066 may be smooth. Theratchet shaft 1066 may also include alocking end 1067. The lockingend 1067 may be located at the approximately location of the lockingbar 1060, such that the lockingend 1067 engages the lockingbar 1060 and specifically thelocking slot 1063 on thelocking bar 1060 during locking operations as will be described below. Additionally, the plurality ofteeth 1069 are configured to engage the end of thepusher lock 1068 during locking operations as will be described below. Theratchet shaft 1066 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. - As illustrated in
FIG. 92A , the locking mechanism also includes thepusher lock 1068. - The
pusher lock 1068 may be connected to or engaged with thepusher 1040. Thepusher lock 1068 may have a pointed end opposite the side that is engaged with thepusher 1040. The pointed end of thepusher lock 1068 may be configured to engage the plurality ofteeth 1069 on theratchet shaft 1066 during locking operations as will be described below. Thepusher lock 1068 may be made of any suitable material, such as metal or plastic. - The operation of the
merchandise system 1010 includes both locking and door opening and these operations can be done simultaneously. As illustrated inFIG. 93 , themerchandise system 1010 is shown in an unlocked condition with thedoor 1020 closed. In this configuration, thedoor 1020 is closed and thedoor spring 1032 is not extended or uncoiled. The lockingbar 1060 is not extended. The lockinglatch 1064 is not engaged with thelocking gear 1062. Theratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that one of the smooth sides faces upward toward thepusher lock 1068. As annotated as reference letter “A” inFIG. 93 , when theratchet shaft 1066 is in the position as shown, the pointed end of thepusher lock 1068 rests on the smooth side of theratchet shaft 1066. This allows thepusher 1040 to move freely both forward and backward. As further annotated as reference letter “B” inFIG. 93 , when the lockinglatch 1064 is in the position shown, thelocking gear 1062 can rotate freely, thereby allowing thedoor spring 1032 to uncoil and thedoor 1020 to swing open when pressure is applied to thedoor handle 1022.FIG. 94 illustrates a similar configuration that includes product with themerchandise system 1010 in an unlocked condition with thedoor 1020 closed. -
FIG. 95 illustrates a configuration with themerchandise system 1010 in an unlocked condition with thedoor 1020 open. In this configuration, thedoor 1020 is open with thedoor spring 1032 extended and uncoiled. The lockingbar 1060 is not extended. The lockinglatch 1064 is not engaged with thelocking gear 1062. Theratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that one of the smooth sides faces upward toward thepusher lock 1068. As annotated as reference letter “B” inFIG. 93 , when the lockinglatch 1064 is in the position shown, thelocking gear 1062 can rotate freely, thereby allowing thedoor spring 1032 to uncoil and thedoor 1020 to swing open when pressure is applied to thedoor handle 1022. -
FIG. 96 illustrates a configuration with themerchandise system 1010 in a locked condition with thedoor 1020 closed. In this configuration, the door is closed with thedoor spring 1032 not extended and not uncoiled. The lockingbar 1060 is extended. When the lockingbar 1066 shift positions, the lockingbar 1066 forces the lockinglatch 1064 to engage thelocking gear 1062 and the lockingbar 1066 rotates theratchet shaft 1066. The lockinglatch 1064 is engaged with thelocking gear 1062. Theratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that the side with the plurality ofteeth 1069 faces upward towards thepusher lock 1068, thereby engaging thepusher lock 1068 with one of the plurality ofteeth 1069 on theratchet shaft 1066. As annotated as reference letter “A” inFIG. 96 , when theratchet shaft 1066 rotates into the position shown, the pointed end of thepusher lock 1068 falls into one of the plurality ofteeth 1069 on theratchet shaft 1066, thereby locking thepusher paddle 1040 at the current position. Additionally, as annotated as reference letter “B” inFIG. 96 , when the lockinglatch 1064 is in the position shown, the lockinglatch 1064 engages the gear teeth on thelocking gear 1062. Thelocking gear 1062 cannot rotate clockwise and thus thedoor spring 1032 cannot uncoil. This locks thedoor 1020 from swinging open. -
FIG. 97 illustrates a configuration with themerchandise system 1010 in a locked condition with thedoor 1020 open. In this configuration, the door is open with thedoor spring 1032 extended and uncoiled. As was previously described above forFIG. 96 , when the lockingbar 1066 shift positions, the lockingbar 1066 forces the lockinglatch 1064 to engage thelocking gear 1062 and the lockingbar 1066 rotates theratchet shaft 1066. The lockinglatch 1064 is engaged with thelocking gear 1062. Theratchet shaft 1066 is rotated such that the side with the plurality ofteeth 1069 faces upward towards thepusher lock 1068, thereby engaging thepusher lock 1068 with one of the plurality ofteeth 1069 on theratchet shaft 1066. As annotated as reference letter “B” inFIG. 97 , when the lockinglatch 1064 is in the position shown, the lockinglatch 1064 engages the gear teeth on thelocking gear 1062. Thelocking gear 1062 cannot rotate clockwise and thus thedoor spring 1032 cannot uncoil. This locks thedoor 1020 from swinging open. However, thelocking gear 1062 can ramp over the lockinglatch 1064 in a counter clockwise motion, thus allowing thedoor spring 1032 to recoil and thedoor 1020 to close. -
FIG. 98A illustrates a bottom view of themerchandise system 1010 in an unlocked condition. As is illustrated inFIG. 98A , similar to the description above forFIG. 93 , the lockingbar 1060 is not extended. Because the lockingbar 1060 is not extended, theslot 1063 on thelocking bar 1060 presses against the lockingend 1067 of theratchet shaft 1066 and keeps theratchet shaft 1066 in the position with thepusher lock 1068 resting on the smooth side of theratchet shaft 1066. Additionally, because thelocking bar 1060 is not extended, the lockingmember 1061 is not engaged with the lockinglatch 1064, thereby allowing thelocking gear 1062 to rotate freely and allow thedoor spring 1032 to uncoil and thedoor 1020 to swing open. -
FIG. 98B illustrates a bottom view of themerchandise system 1010 in a locked condition. As is illustrated inFIG. 98B , similar to the description above forFIG. 96 , the lockingbar 1060 is extended. When the lockingbar 1060 extends, theslot 1063 on thelocking bar 1060 presses against the lockingend 1067 of theratchet shaft 1066, thereby rotating theratchet shaft 1066 such that the side with the plurality ofteeth 1069 faces upward and engages thepusher lock 1068. Additionally, when the lockingbar 1060 extends, the lockingmember 1061 engages the lockinglatch 1064, thereby moving thelocking latch 1064 to engage with thelocking gear 1062 and the gear teeth. Thelocking gear 1062 cannot rotate clockwise, and thus thedoor spring 1032 cannot uncoil. This locks thedoor 1020 from swinging open. -
FIG. 99 illustrates another feature of themerchandise system 1010, namely the operation of thedoor 1020. As is illustrated inFIG. 99 , the door includes afirst roller 1024 and asecond roller 1026. Thefirst roller 1024 may slidably engage with anupper slot 1055 in thehousing 1050. Thesecond roller 1026 may slidably engage with alower slot 1057 in thehousing 1050. During the door operation, through the design of thefirst roller 1024, thesecond roller 1026, theupper slot 1055, and thelower slot 1057, the back end and the floor of thedoor 1020 keeps the next product behind the door from sliding forward. Thedoor 1020 continually contacts the product along the same vertical plane throughout the door's motion. As is shown inFIG. 99 , through reference letters “A” through “E”, the door operation is represented from the closed position to the open position, with “A” representing the closed position and “E” representing the open position. As illustrated by “A”, thefirst roller 1024 is positioned in the lower portion of theslot 1055, the second roller is positioned in the lower portion of theslot 1057 and thedoor handle 1022 is closed. As thedoor 1020 moves to position “B”, as can been seen inFIG. 99 , thefirst roller 1024 moves a longer distance along theupper slot 1055 than does thesecond roller 1026 along thelower slot 1057. As thedoor 1020 moves to position “C”, thefirst roller 1024 has almost moved to the end of theupper slot 1055, while thesecond roller 1026 has not moved much along thelower slot 1057. As thedoor 1020 moves to position “D”, the second roller moves a longer distance along thelower slot 1057, while thefirst roller 1024 moves a smaller distance along theupper slot 1055. As thedoor 1020 moves to position “E”, thesecond roller 1026 again moves a longer distance along thelower slot 1057 to the final upper position in thelower slot 1057 and thefirst roller 1024 moves a small amount into the final upper position in theupper slot 1055. The design and shape of theupper slot 1055 and thelower slot 1057 combined together with the geometry of thedoor 1020 allow the door to contact the product on the same vertical plane throughout the motion of thedoor 1020, thereby keeping the next product behind the door from sliding forward. Once the product is removed from thedoor 1020 by the consumer, thepusher 1040 andpusher spring 1044 will push the next product into thedoor 1020 when thedoor 1020 returns to the closed position, thereby reloading thedoor 1020 with product. - As was described above, more than one
merchandise system 1010 may be placed adjacent to other likemerchandise systems 1010 on a shelf. Additionally, themerchandise system 1010 may include anelectronic control unit 1080 to control the locking operations of all merchandise systems linked together. As shown inFIG. 100 ,multiple merchandise systems 1010 may be linked together. Additionally, anelectronic control unit 1080 may be located at the end of the linkedmerchandise systems 1010. Theelectronic control unit 1080 may be used to improve product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from themerchandise systems 1010 by locking and/or alarming themerchandise systems 1010 when too many products are removed at one time. - For the present embodiment described above in
FIGS. 92A through 99 , the electronic control unit may include a mechanical member (not shown) linked to the locking bars 1060 of theadjacent merchandise systems 1010. This mechanical member may be activated to move based on the parameters set in theelectronic control unit 1080, thereby extending or moving the linkedlocking bars 1060 of themerchandise systems 1010. When the linkedlocking bars 1060 extend or move, the lockingbars 1060 lock thedoors 1020 and thepushers 1040 on themerchandise systems 1010 as described above. - A number of parameters may be included or loaded into the
electronic control unit 1080 to control the flow of product by alarming and/or locking themerchandise systems 1010 without departing from this invention. One such parameter may be theelectronic control unit 1080 locking the merchandise systems after a certain number of consecutive door openings, such as three door openings. For example, if a consumer attempts to open any three doors consecutively on themerchandise system 1010, theelectronic control unit 1080 may then alarm and send a signal to the mechanical member, thereby extending and moving the locking bars 1060 and locking thedoors 1020. This parameter may be changed based on the needs of the store or consumers and products, such as after two times, four times, five times, or more. Additionally, the definition of “consecutive” may also be varied within theelectronic control unit 1080. For example, “consecutive” may mean three door openings within a 10-minute time period, or within a 5-minute time period. Additionally, “consecutive” could mean that time between individual or multiple door openings must be greater than two minutes, or greater than one minute, or greater than some other time variable. Multiple variations of number of openings and time variables may be used for theelectronic control unit 1080 without departing from this invention. - Additionally, when the
electronic control unit 1080 is triggered to lock or alarm, theelectronic control unit 1080 may also be configured to send a signal to an alarm system or messaging system. For example, when theelectronic control unit 1080 is triggered to lock or alarm, theelectronic control unit 1080 may send a signal to an intercom system in a store the signals the store personnel to come to themerchandise system 1010 to either reset the system or to deal with a possible theft situation. Additionally, without departing from the invention, theelectronic control unit 1080 can send an electronic signal to many other devices or systems, including, but not limited to, office phones, cell phones, cash registers, office computers, emails, etc. In addition to sending an electronic signal, theelectronic control unit 1080 may light analarm light 1082, as illustrated inFIG. 100 . - The
electronic control unit 1080 may also include akey system 1081 as illustrated inFIG. 100 . Thekey system 1081 may be utilized to reset an alarm or locked situation. Additionally, thekey system 1081 may be utilized to override the locking system if a key is left in thekey system 1081. This override capability may be advantageous to store personnel when stocking or restocking themerchandise system 1010. Thekey system 1081 may be utilized for various other functions without departing from this invention. - In an alternate embodiment the door assembly may also include a
door spacer bar 1090 as illustrated inFIGS. 101A, 101B, and 101C . Thedoor spacer bar 1090 may be used as an alternative to thedoor spacer 1036 illustrated inFIGS. 92A and 93 . Thedoor spacer bar 1090 may include anattached end 1092 and alocking end 1094. The attachedend 1092 may be attached, pinned, or connected to thedoor 1020 near the front of thedoor 1020 such that the lockingend 1094 of thedoor spacer bar 1090 can rotate away from the front of thedoor 1020. The lockingend 1094 may rotate away from the front of thedoor 1020. The lockingend 1094 may move and be locked into place in one of a plurality of doorspacer bar teeth 1096. The door spacer bar teeth may be configured to lock thelocking end 1094 of thedoor spacer bar 1090 at the depth of the package. Additionally, thedoor spacer bar 1090 may include a door spacerbar locking tab 1098 located to lock in the top of the rotational door spacer bar as illustrated inFIGS. 101A, 101B, and 101C . The door spacerbar locking tab 1098 may slide from an unlocked position to a locked position, wherein thelocking tab 1098 locks the attached end of thedoor spacer bar 1090. - The
door spacer bar 1090, like thedoor spacer 1036, may allow the user to adjust the door for different depths of packages in the display.FIG. 101A illustrates thedoor spacer bar 1090 not adjusted for depth of packages. As illustrated inFIG. 101A , thedoor spacer bar 1090 is flush against the front of thedoor 1020 and thelocking tab 1098 is in the locked position, thereby locking thedoor spacer bar 1090 in place.FIG. 101B illustrates thedoor spacer bar 1090 being adjusted for a thinner depth of package. As illustrated inFIG. 101B , thelocking tab 1098 may slide to the unlocked position and thedoor spacer bar 1090 is rotated away from the front of thedoor 1020.FIG. 101C illustrates thedoor spacer bar 1090 in the adjusted position and locked for a thinner depth of a package. As illustrated in 101C, thelocking tab 1098 is positioned back in the locked position and the lockingend 1094 of thedoor spacer bar 1090 is seated in one of the plurality of doorspacer bar teeth 1096. -
FIGS. 102 through 106E illustrate another embodiment of the present invention.FIGS. 102 through 106E illustrate amerchandise system 2000 that improves product merchandising by limiting the number and the frequency with which product can be removed from, for example, a merchandising shelf by using various methods. Themerchandise system 2000 may generally include abase 2030 andhousing 2050, and a window ordoor 2010. -
FIG. 102 illustrates amerchandise system 2000 that holds a number of products, such as cans (for example, baby formula cans) in the merchandise system that would be accessible to the customer one at a time out of the front of themerchandise system 2000. Referring toFIG. 102 , in an exemplary embodiment,merchandise system 2000 includes abase 2030. Thebase 2030 defines a generally flat planar surface that may be configured to engage with or mount onto any known shelf used in a store, as well as anyother merchandise system 2000, and in any known mounting configuration and orientation. Thebase 2030 defines afront edge 2032, aback edge 2034, afirst side edge 2036, a second side edge 2038, and one ormore tracks 2033. - As is further illustrated in
FIG. 102 , ahousing 2050 can be mounted to thebase 2030 in any known mounting configuration and orientation. Thehousing 2050 defines atop wall 2052 and a pair ofside walls 2054. Thehousing 2050 may also include a rear retaining wall (not shown in the figures). - As shown in
FIG. 102 andFIGS. 103A-103D , the one ormore tracks 2033 may extend along the base 2030 from theback edge 2034 to thefront edge 2032.FIG. 103A is a front view of themerchandise system 2000.FIG. 103B is another isometric view of themerchandise system 2000.FIGS. 103C and 103D are isometric views of thebase 2030 andtrack 2033 of the of themerchandise system 2000. As shown, atrack 2033 can be used with apusher 2040. It should be understood that more or less than two tracks could be used with the invention, depending on the particular application. - As illustrated in
FIG. 102 andFIGS. 103A-D , the one ormore tracks 2033 extend longitudinally along the length of thebase 2030 and may define at least one rail and/or an elongated aperture or channel in thebase 2030. Thetrack 2033 is sized and shaped to receive and mount a mating element of thepusher 2040. Thepusher 2040 may be slidably mounted to thebase 2030 such that thepusher 2040 does not lift out of thetrack 2033. The present invention contemplates the use of other tracks to mount thepusher 2040 to thebase 2030. Other pusher mounting techniques are possible with the invention. - The
pusher 2040 also contains at least one pusher urging element used to urge thepusher 2040 toward the front of the shelf. The pusher urging element may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring or a spiral torsion spring. The present invention may use one or more pusher urging elements to urge thepusher 2040 depending on the desired application. The pusher urging element may be mounted to thepusher 2040 and thebase 2030 using any known mounting technique. In the exemplary embodiment, one end of the pusher urging element is secured to thebase 2030 near thefront edge 2032 of thebase 2030, and the opposing end of the pusher urging element positioned behind thepusher 2040 to urge thepusher 2040 toward the front of thewindow 2010. Additionally, eachmerchandise system 2000 may also have aslow moving pusher 2040 with a damper attached to thepusher 2040 to slow the movement of the product from the back to the front of themerchandise system 2000. As illustrated inFIGS. 103A and 103B , themerchandise system 2000 uses atrack 2033 and aslow pusher 2040 so that after a product is removed, aslow moving pusher 2040 moves product forward. Additionally, as illustrated inFIGS. 103C and 103D , themerchandise systems 2000 may be mounted to a surface using fasteners through the floor of themerchandise system 2000. - The front of each
merchandise system 2000 may include its own individual security window ordoor 2010 attached to themerchandise system 2000. The window may be rotatable from a closed position to an open position about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the housing, such that thewindow 2010 is rotatable in an upward or vertical direction. Thewindow 2010 may be made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through thewindow 2010. Themerchandise system 2000 may also include ageometric aperture 2035 on thesidewalls 2034 towards the front of themerchandise system 2000. Thegeometric aperture 2035 may make it difficult (even with thesecurity window 2010 open) for a consumer to get their fingers around enough of the next can or product moving forward to pull it out of themerchandise system 2000 until the product has advanced forward as designed. -
FIGS. 104A and 104B illustrate top-down isometric views of themerchandise system 2000. As illustrated inFIGS. 104A and 104B , themerchandise system 2000 may include anaudio box 2016 included with themerchandise system 2000. Theaudio box 2016 may be located on thetop wall 2052 of thehousing 2050. Themerchandise system 2000 with theaudio box 2016 may be triggered in a similar fashion to theother merchandise systems 2000 as described above. Additionally, there may be another different type ofmerchandise system 2000 wherein the audio box is not included on thetop wall 2052 of thehousing 2050. - Both types of
merchandise systems 2000 may include atrigger axle 2012 located just behind the hinge point of thewindow 2010. Thetrigger axle 2012 may also include acantilever 2014. As illustrated inFIGS. 104A and 104B , when thewindow 2010 is rotated, it rotates thetrigger axle 2012 and thecantilever 2014 attached to thetrigger axle 2012. Thecantilever 2014 may rotate up against a switch trigger on theaudio box 2016 to sound theaudio box 2016 on themerchandise system 2000. -
FIGS. 105A through 105E illustrate isometric views of themerchandise system 2000 in operation with afirst product 2002.FIG. 105A illustrates themerchandise system 2000 with thewindow 2010 closed and thefirst product 2002 located inside thehousing 2050.FIG. 105B illustrates themerchandise system 2000 with thewindow 2010 rotated and lifted up and thefirst product 2002 being removed from thehousing 2050.FIG. 105C illustrates themerchandise system 2000 with thewindow 2010 still rotated open and thefirst product 2002 removed from thehousing 2050. Asecond product 2003 is seen located in thehousing 2050 at this stage.FIG. 105D illustrates themerchandise system 2000 with thewindow 2010 still rotated open with thesecond product 2003 starting to slowly slide forward with thepusher 2040.FIG. 105E illustrates themerchandise system 2000 with thewindow 2010 closed again and thesecond product 2003 located inside thehousing 2050. -
FIGS. 106A through 106E illustrate anexample merchandise system 2000 that includesmultiple housings 2050. Thetrigger axle 2012 may include both amale connection point 2020 on one side and afemale connection point 2022 on the opposite side. The circle illustrated inFIG. 106D shows themale connection point 2020 and thefemale connection point 2022 of thetrigger axle 2012. As was discussed above, themerchandise system 2000 may include ahousing 2050 with anaudio box 2016 or ahousing 2050 without an audio box. Thetrigger axels 2012 of additional (non-audio and audio)merchandise systems 2000 can be mated together so that a singleaudio merchandise system 2000 can be activated by numerousnon-audio merchandise systems 2000.FIG. 106E illustrates a first merchandise system 2000A that includes anaudio box 2016 attached to asecond merchandise system 2000B that is a non-audio system. Bothmerchandise systems 2000A, 2000B include the trigger axles 2012A, 2012B and the cantilevers 2014A, 2014B attached together in order to switch the trigger to sound theaudio box 2016 on the merchandise system 2000A. - The
trigger axle 2012 may allow a number ofnon-audio merchandise systems 2000 to be connected in-line with each other and ultimately to one of themerchandise systems 2000 that includes an audio box. Once themerchandise systems 2000 are connected together (with non-audio box and audio box systems), any of the windows on the connected,non-audio merchandise systems 2000 can trigger the single audio box housed in theaudio merchandise system 2000. This allows a mechanical approach to connecting multiple, less-expensive,non-audio merchandise systems 2000 to a singleaudio merchandise system 2000, which makes the average cost of the audio per facing significantly lower. This may also decrease the battery replacement for store employees to one audio box per linear run rather than multiple audio boxes in the same run. - Additionally, the
merchandise system 2000 may include a “guillotine” type device that could be activated by the opening of the security window. When thedoor 2010 is lifted upwards, the guillotine portion may extend downwards into the two “pockets” formed on either side of the tangent point (from a top view) between a product or can in front and a product or can immediately behind it. This guillotine portion would effectively block the removal of the next product or can until the slow pusher moved the product or can forward enough to allow the guillotine to fall behind that product or can when the window is opened. - Additionally, the
merchandise system 2000 may include a mechanical lock-out device for all windows of the attachedmerchandise systems 2000. This may be similar in design to a mechanical version of the electronic lock-out module as described above and illustrated inFIGS. 92A through 101C . This mechanical lock-out module may include incorporating a fluid-filled damper element attached to thetrigger axle 2012. The use of a fluid-filled damper element may allow themerchandise system 2000 to have a set number of door openings before triggering a mechanical lock-out of all of the attached security windows. Once the fluid-filled damper relaxes, the damper would allow the windows to be opened once again. - Variations and modifications of the foregoing are within the scope of the present invention. It should be understood that the invention disclosed and defined herein extends to the individual features and all alternative combinations of two or more of the individual features mentioned or evident from the text and/or drawings. All of these different combinations constitute various alternative aspects of the present invention. The embodiments described herein explain the best modes known for practicing the invention and will enable others skilled in the art to utilize the invention.
Claims (21)
1. (canceled)
2. A merchandising system, comprising:
a first base configured to support product;
a first housing configured to engage with the first base, comprising a top wall, a first side wall, and a second side wall, wherein the first side wall and the second side wall each include a geometric aperture towards a front of the first housing, wherein the geometric aperture makes it difficult for a consumer to get their fingers around enough of a product moving forward to remove it from the first housing until the product has advanced forward; and
a first window rotatable in an upward or vertical direction from a closed position to an open position about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the first housing.
3. The merchandising system of claim 2 , wherein the geometric aperture has an upper edge spaced downward away from the top wall of the first housing.
4. The merchandising system of claim 3 , wherein a bottom edge of the first window extends below the upper edge of the geometric aperture.
5. The merchandising system of claim 2 , further comprising a first trigger axle located along the top wall adjacent to and behind the hinge point of the first window, wherein when the first window is rotated, the first trigger axle is rotated.
6. The merchandising system of claim 5 , wherein the first trigger axle includes a first cantilever that is attached to the first trigger axle, wherein when the first window is rotated, the first cantilever is rotated.
7. The merchandising system of claim 6 , further including an audio box configured to sound an alarm, wherein when the first window is rotated, the first cantilever rotates against a first switch trigger located on the audio box to sound the audio box.
8. The merchandising system of claim 5 , further comprising:
a second base configured to support product,
a second housing configured to engage the second base,
a second window rotatable from a closed position to an open position, and
a second trigger axle that mates with the first trigger axle, wherein when wherein when the first trigger axle is rotated, the second trigger axle is rotated.
9. The merchandising system of claim 2 , wherein the first window is made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through the first window.
10. The merchandising system of claim 2 , further including a mechanical lock-out module that allows the first window to have a set number of window openings before triggering a mechanical lock-out of opening of the first window.
11. The merchandising system of claim 10 , wherein the mechanical lock-out module includes a fluid filled damper element attached to a first trigger axle located along the top wall adjacent to and behind the hinge point of the first window, wherein when the first window is rotated, the first trigger axle is rotated.
12. The merchandising system of claim 5 , wherein the first trigger axle includes a male connection point on one end and a female connection point on an opposite end to the male connection point.
13. A merchandising system, comprising:
a base configured to support product;
a housing configured to engage with the base, comprising a top wall, a first side wall, and a second side wall;
a window having a front surface, a first side surface and a second side surface, wherein the window is rotatable about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the housing in an upward or vertical direction; and
a mechanical lock-out module that allows the window to have a set number of window openings before triggering a mechanical lock-out of opening of the window, wherein the mechanical lock-out module includes a fluid filled damper element.
14. The merchandising system of claim 13 , wherein the fluid filled damper element is attached to a trigger axle located along the top wall adjacent to and behind the hinge point of the window.
15. The merchandising system of claim 13 , wherein the window is made of a clear or transparent material that allows for the product to be viewed through the window.
16. The merchandising system of claim 13 , wherein the base further comprises a track.
17. The merchandising system of claim 16 , wherein a pusher is adapted to engage the track.
18. A merchandising system, comprising:
a base configured to support product;
a housing configured to engage with the base, comprising a top wall;
a window, wherein the window is rotatable about a hinge point adjacent to the top wall of the housing in an upward or vertical direction;
a trigger axle located along the top wall adjacent to and behind the hinge point of the window;
an audio box configured to sound an alarm and located on the housing; and
wherein when the window is rotated, the trigger axle is rotated causing the audio box to sound.
19. The merchandising system of claim 18 , wherein the trigger axle includes a cantilever, wherein when the trigger axle is rotated, the cantilever is rotated.
20. The merchandising system of claim 19 , the trigger axle rotates against a switch trigger located on the audio box to sound the audio box.
21. The merchandising system of claim 18 , wherein the trigger axle includes a male connection point on one end and a female connection point on an opposite end to the male connection point.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/342,907 US20210369007A1 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2021-06-09 | Product Securement and Management System |
Applications Claiming Priority (18)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US54180404P | 2004-02-03 | 2004-02-03 | |
US11/047,915 US7661545B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2005-02-01 | Product securement and management system |
US11/140,023 US7150365B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2005-05-27 | Product securement and management system |
US78200006P | 2006-03-13 | 2006-03-13 | |
US11/612,210 US7299934B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2006-12-18 | Product securement and management system |
US11/685,530 US7451881B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2007-03-13 | Product securement and management system |
US11/858,545 US7621409B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2007-09-20 | Product securement and management system |
US12/496,389 US8113601B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2009-07-01 | Product securement and management system |
US12/872,721 US8047385B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2010-08-31 | Product securement and management system |
US13/230,362 US8235227B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2011-09-12 | Product securement and management system |
US13/544,363 US8413823B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2012-07-09 | Product securement and management system |
US201261708967P | 2012-10-02 | 2012-10-02 | |
US13/858,574 US9526351B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2013-04-08 | Product securement and management system |
US14/044,361 US9375100B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2013-10-02 | Product securement and management system |
US15/165,470 US9844280B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2016-05-26 | Product securement and management system |
US15/828,777 US10349755B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2017-12-01 | Product securement and management system |
US16/431,350 US11058234B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2019-06-04 | Product securement and management system |
US17/342,907 US20210369007A1 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2021-06-09 | Product Securement and Management System |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/431,350 Continuation US11058234B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2019-06-04 | Product securement and management system |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20210369007A1 true US20210369007A1 (en) | 2021-12-02 |
Family
ID=50546391
Family Applications (5)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/044,361 Expired - Fee Related US9375100B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2013-10-02 | Product securement and management system |
US15/165,470 Active US9844280B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2016-05-26 | Product securement and management system |
US15/828,777 Active US10349755B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2017-12-01 | Product securement and management system |
US16/431,350 Active US11058234B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2019-06-04 | Product securement and management system |
US17/342,907 Abandoned US20210369007A1 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2021-06-09 | Product Securement and Management System |
Family Applications Before (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/044,361 Expired - Fee Related US9375100B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2013-10-02 | Product securement and management system |
US15/165,470 Active US9844280B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2016-05-26 | Product securement and management system |
US15/828,777 Active US10349755B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2017-12-01 | Product securement and management system |
US16/431,350 Active US11058234B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2019-06-04 | Product securement and management system |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (5) | US9375100B2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (35)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9375100B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2016-06-28 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US11375826B2 (en) * | 2004-02-03 | 2022-07-05 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US9706857B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2017-07-18 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US9898712B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2018-02-20 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Continuous display shelf edge label device |
US9818148B2 (en) | 2013-03-05 | 2017-11-14 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | In-store item alert architecture |
US8938396B2 (en) * | 2004-02-03 | 2015-01-20 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | System for inventory management |
US8047385B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2011-11-01 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US9418497B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2016-08-16 | Michael Earl Ingle | Device and method for self-limiting access to objects and substances |
US9848716B2 (en) | 2013-10-08 | 2017-12-26 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Vending shelf |
US10154739B2 (en) | 2013-12-02 | 2018-12-18 | Retail Space Solutions Llc | Universal merchandiser and methods relating to same |
USD801734S1 (en) | 2014-12-01 | 2017-11-07 | Retail Space Solutions Llc | Shelf management parts |
US11182738B2 (en) | 2014-11-12 | 2021-11-23 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | System for inventory management |
AU2015346254B2 (en) * | 2014-11-12 | 2018-08-02 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | System for inventory management |
EP3250086A2 (en) * | 2015-01-28 | 2017-12-06 | The Heartbeat Manufacturing Co (Redditch) Limited | Shelf management device |
WO2017015466A1 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2017-01-26 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandiser and methods relating to same |
CA2952092A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2017-06-30 | Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. | Systems and methods for forecasting on-shelf product availability |
USD836954S1 (en) | 2016-03-02 | 2019-01-01 | Retail Space Solutions Llc | Shelf components |
USD843760S1 (en) | 2016-03-02 | 2019-03-26 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Shelf components |
US20170311734A1 (en) * | 2016-04-29 | 2017-11-02 | Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. | System and Apparatus for Front-Facing Products |
US20190183259A1 (en) | 2016-08-31 | 2019-06-20 | Invue Security Products Inc. | Modular shelf sweep detector |
USD856040S1 (en) | 2016-09-12 | 2019-08-13 | Retail Space Solutions Llc | Merchandiser parts |
US10959540B2 (en) | 2016-12-05 | 2021-03-30 | Retail Space Solutions Llc | Shelf management system, components thereof, and related methods |
US11068949B2 (en) * | 2016-12-09 | 2021-07-20 | 365 Retail Markets, Llc | Distributed and automated transaction systems |
WO2018200997A1 (en) | 2017-04-27 | 2018-11-01 | Retail Space Solutions Llc | Shelf-mounted tray and methods relating to same |
US10463173B2 (en) * | 2017-07-12 | 2019-11-05 | Beeline Group, Llc | Product pusher |
CN107997491B (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2020-05-05 | 浙江黄岩黎明实业有限公司 | Application method of invisible seal display box |
CN108244887B (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2020-05-05 | 浙江黄岩黎明实业有限公司 | Invisible seal display box |
CN107981622B (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2020-06-05 | 叶红月 | Invisible seal anti-theft display box |
USD860761S1 (en) * | 2018-02-06 | 2019-09-24 | Adroit Worldwide Media, Inc. | Modular display bracket |
US11357341B2 (en) * | 2019-02-26 | 2022-06-14 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Retail merchandise display device with security shield |
US11627819B1 (en) * | 2020-04-09 | 2023-04-18 | Walgreen Co. | Anti-theft system and method for cosmetic products |
CN111449432B (en) * | 2020-04-26 | 2021-12-14 | 河南中医药大学 | Multifunctional book storage device |
USD941660S1 (en) * | 2020-06-22 | 2022-01-25 | Adroit Worldwide Media, Inc. | Wrap around topper assembly |
USD941121S1 (en) * | 2020-06-22 | 2022-01-18 | Adroit Worldwide Media, Inc. | Joiner bracket cabinet assembly |
CN113170994B (en) * | 2021-04-30 | 2022-05-06 | 盐城工业职业技术学院 | Diversified display device of advertisement design product |
Family Cites Families (602)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3103396A (en) | 1963-09-10 | portnoy | ||
DE7311113U (en) | 1973-03-24 | 1973-08-16 | Unternehmensberatung Koch A | Display rack |
US154940A (en) | 1874-09-15 | Improvement in adjustable partitions for book-cases | ||
US101130A (en) | 1870-03-22 | Improvement in paper-files | ||
US2563570A (en) | 1951-08-07 | Space apportioning divider for beds | ||
US355511A (en) | 1887-01-04 | Book-support | ||
US309715A (en) | 1884-12-23 | Thomas henry harper | ||
US2732952A (en) | 1956-01-31 | skelton | ||
US3124254A (en) | 1964-03-10 | folding and nesting delivery tray for bakery goods or the like | ||
US632231A (en) | 1898-02-11 | 1899-09-05 | Nat Ticket Case Company | Ticket-case. |
US808067A (en) | 1904-04-18 | 1905-12-26 | William Cyrus Briggs | Mechanism for feeding cigars to banding mechanisms. |
US806719A (en) | 1905-04-22 | 1905-12-05 | Rudolph Winchel | Grocer's bin. |
US849590A (en) | 1905-11-17 | 1907-04-09 | Lawson J Bailey | Sales-case for tobacco, &c. |
US847863A (en) | 1906-04-19 | 1907-03-19 | Thomas A Watts | Vending-machine. |
US1156140A (en) | 1914-02-19 | 1915-10-12 | Benjamin M Hair | Vending device. |
US1154940A (en) | 1914-09-04 | 1915-09-28 | Ernst M C Schmidt | Egg and cream beater. |
DE337340C (en) | 1919-03-22 | 1921-05-31 | Franz Schmoll | Punch rod with interchangeable wires |
US1682580A (en) | 1923-07-18 | 1928-08-28 | Edwin D Pratt | Method and apparatus for dispensing napkins |
US1712080A (en) | 1924-05-21 | 1929-05-07 | Kelly William Willard | Display sales rack |
US1731661A (en) | 1926-05-14 | 1929-10-15 | Vimco Mfg Company Inc | Electrical current tap plug or connecter |
US1703987A (en) | 1926-10-25 | 1929-03-05 | Willard A Sloper | Store delivery apparatus |
US1718249A (en) | 1927-01-07 | 1929-06-25 | Doehler Die Casting Co | Securing means for vending machines |
US1713661A (en) | 1927-05-11 | 1929-05-21 | Vacuum Oil Company | Display cabinet |
US1714266A (en) | 1927-09-15 | 1929-05-21 | Johnson Charles Ernest | Adjustable cabinet dish tray |
US1734031A (en) | 1928-04-02 | 1929-11-05 | Milwaukee Paper Box Company | Dispensing device |
US1702987A (en) | 1928-04-17 | 1929-02-19 | Gordon C Wilson | Tray |
US1786392A (en) | 1928-12-10 | 1930-12-23 | Edward F Kemp | Holder for confectionery |
US1813713A (en) | 1929-04-20 | 1931-07-07 | Waterbury Button Company | Toy bank and vending machine |
US1964597A (en) | 1931-10-09 | 1934-06-26 | Rapellin Rene | Cigarette dispensing device |
US1971749A (en) | 1931-12-11 | 1934-08-28 | Hamilton Mfg Co | Type case |
US2085479A (en) | 1933-04-06 | 1937-06-29 | Fort Howard Paper Co | Dispenser cabinet |
DE697994C (en) | 1933-04-20 | 1940-10-29 | Hoesch Akt Ges | Process for removing or binding nitrogen in the manufacture of steel by the duplex process |
US1991102A (en) | 1934-07-09 | 1935-02-12 | William J Kernaghan | Metal display rack |
US2057627A (en) | 1935-04-01 | 1936-10-13 | Starline | Ventilation system for cattle barns and the like |
US2079754A (en) | 1935-07-17 | 1937-05-11 | William V Waxgiser | Article projection apparatus for shelves |
US2129122A (en) | 1936-07-10 | 1938-09-06 | Beech Nut Packing Co | Display stand |
US2110299A (en) | 1936-11-23 | 1938-03-08 | Hinkle Cecil Edward | Bottle rack |
US2111496A (en) | 1936-11-27 | 1938-03-15 | Midland Wire & Metal Products | Display and dispensing rack |
US2218444A (en) | 1938-04-11 | 1940-10-15 | George S Vineyard | Merchandise dispenser |
US2185605A (en) | 1938-04-25 | 1940-01-02 | John M Murphy | Package accessory |
US2247834A (en) | 1940-02-26 | 1941-07-01 | Jr Charles A Davis | Cracker dispenser |
US2362758A (en) | 1942-07-08 | 1944-11-14 | Marrow Kirkpatrick | Recording apparatus |
US2516122A (en) | 1945-09-20 | 1950-07-25 | Hope Metal Products Co | Metal bin |
US2499088A (en) | 1947-03-29 | 1950-02-28 | Brill | Refrigerated display case |
US2555102A (en) | 1948-10-05 | 1951-05-29 | Miner S Anderson | Combined bottle carrier and rack |
US2538165A (en) | 1949-01-06 | 1951-01-16 | Richard F Randtke | Filing box and follower member |
US2629644A (en) | 1949-04-20 | 1953-02-24 | Heys George | Fishing tackle box |
US2652154A (en) | 1949-12-27 | 1953-09-15 | John F Mccarthy | Display rack |
US2738881A (en) | 1950-04-13 | 1956-03-20 | Michel Gino | Display and storage holder for containers |
NL160826B (en) | 1950-04-29 | Ici Ltd | PROCEDURE FOR PREPARING A PREPARATION WITH FUNGICIDE EFFICACY BASED ON A PYRIMIDINE DERIVATIVE, AND A PROCESS FOR PREPARING PYRIMIDINE DERIVATIVES WITH FUNGICIDE ACTION. | |
DE969003C (en) | 1952-03-14 | 1958-04-17 | Ver Werkstaetten Wittenau G M | Adjustable shaft for self-sellers |
US2678045A (en) | 1952-04-15 | 1954-05-11 | Frances C Erhard | Card sorting device |
US2784871A (en) | 1952-06-07 | 1957-03-12 | Rowe Mfg Co Inc | Empty signal for columnar merchandising machines |
US2775501A (en) | 1952-08-11 | 1956-12-25 | Kyllo Herman | Tiltable front drawer panel |
US2784872A (en) | 1952-12-19 | 1957-03-12 | Eugene J Lux | Vending machine |
US2806631A (en) | 1953-01-13 | 1957-09-17 | Alburtus Oscar Van Vactor | Automatic merchandising unit |
US2893596A (en) | 1953-03-04 | 1959-07-07 | Rowe Mfg Co Inc | Sandwich merchandising machine |
US2775365A (en) | 1953-03-06 | 1956-12-25 | Percy W Mestman | Bag dispenser |
US2767042A (en) | 1953-03-18 | 1956-10-16 | Gen Motors Corp | Refrigerating apparatus |
CH305283A (en) | 1954-01-22 | 1955-02-15 | Weber Albert Sohn | Shelf console. |
US2750049A (en) | 1954-08-16 | 1956-06-12 | Vendo Co | Vending machine shelf having bottle feeding mechanism |
US2828178A (en) | 1956-06-26 | 1958-03-25 | Gen Electric | Refrigerator compartment shelf and guard assembly |
US2997041A (en) | 1957-01-28 | 1961-08-22 | Whirlpool Co | Cooking oven |
US2918295A (en) | 1957-03-27 | 1959-12-22 | American Mfg Co | Mobile knock-down display rack |
US2934212A (en) | 1957-12-16 | 1960-04-26 | James J Jacobson | Display and dispensing racks |
US2980259A (en) | 1957-12-18 | 1961-04-18 | S & F Mfg Co Inc | Display and dispensing racks |
US2964154A (en) | 1958-02-28 | 1960-12-13 | C E Erickson Co Inc | Tray unit for display stand |
US2948403A (en) | 1958-07-15 | 1960-08-09 | Independent Lock Co | Lock display device |
GB881700A (en) | 1959-09-08 | 1961-11-08 | Wilmot Breeden Ltd | Means for dispensing packets or wrapped goods of uniform shape |
NL106617C (en) | 1959-10-29 | 1963-11-15 | ||
US3083067A (en) | 1960-05-05 | 1963-03-26 | Coopers Inc | Merchandise display and dispensing device |
DE1819158U (en) | 1960-07-04 | 1960-10-06 | Werner Millhan | GOODS CONTAINER WITH AUTOMATIC FEED DEVICE. |
US3151576A (en) | 1961-10-27 | 1964-10-06 | Vita Pakt Citrus Products Co | Display stands |
US3161295A (en) | 1963-01-24 | 1964-12-15 | Chesley Ind Inc | Display device for merchandise |
BE649438A (en) | 1963-06-25 | |||
CH420694A (en) | 1963-12-07 | 1966-09-15 | Acker Norbert Karl | Goods conveyor for universal vending machines |
CH412251A (en) | 1964-01-06 | 1966-04-30 | Gemperle Albert | Display and sales shelf with dividing and feeding device |
US3285429A (en) | 1964-05-25 | 1966-11-15 | Miller Herman Inc | Shelf organizer |
US3308964A (en) | 1964-12-17 | 1967-03-14 | Alfred T Pistone | Bin divider |
US3308961A (en) | 1965-03-03 | 1967-03-14 | Chesley Ind Inc | Package display-dispenser |
GB1088654A (en) | 1965-05-07 | 1967-10-25 | Stephen Arthur Jones | Disposable tongs |
GB1171762A (en) | 1965-11-01 | 1969-11-26 | Molins Machine Co Ltd | Improvements in or relating to Packing Machines. |
US3348732A (en) | 1966-09-02 | 1967-10-24 | Schwarz Heinz Walter | Article dispensing device |
US3357597A (en) | 1966-09-09 | 1967-12-12 | Emory L Groff | Cigar package dispenser |
US3425765A (en) | 1967-04-21 | 1969-02-04 | William Levy | Slidable apparatus to carry a waste container |
US3405716A (en) | 1967-07-03 | 1968-10-15 | Knoll Associates | Guide rod latch for card file drawer |
US3452899A (en) | 1967-10-24 | 1969-07-01 | Albert C Libberton | Follower advanced commodity dispenser |
US3501020A (en) | 1967-12-27 | 1970-03-17 | George Krikorian | Bin construction |
DE1985198U (en) | 1968-01-22 | 1968-05-09 | Ferrero Gmbh | SALES DISPLAY FOR PACKAGES OF GOODS, IN PARTICULAR CHOCOLATE PACKAGES. |
US3497081A (en) | 1968-02-26 | 1970-02-24 | Field Mfg Corp | Shelf divider mechanisms |
US3512652A (en) | 1968-05-20 | 1970-05-19 | Armstrong Store Fixture Corp | Banding and binning means for display shelves |
US3550979A (en) | 1968-06-20 | 1970-12-29 | Miller Herman Inc | Molded card drawers and cabinets therefor |
US3575480A (en) | 1968-09-12 | 1971-04-20 | Walter E Haller & Co | Interlocking arrangement |
US3578207A (en) | 1968-10-21 | 1971-05-11 | James F Danow | Adjustable bread dsipenser with ejector-controlled closure |
GB1295262A (en) | 1969-01-28 | 1972-11-08 | ||
US3625371A (en) | 1969-09-05 | 1971-12-07 | Whirlpool Co | Shelf with tilt down front for freezer |
DE2002720C3 (en) | 1970-01-22 | 1979-10-04 | Matthias 6619 Weiskirchen Scherer | Compartment, especially for pharmacies |
US3652154A (en) | 1970-08-07 | 1972-03-28 | Us Air Force | Light control system for use in very low light intensities |
US3667826A (en) | 1970-11-20 | 1972-06-06 | Hallmark Cards | Merchandise display unit |
US3698568A (en) | 1970-12-18 | 1972-10-17 | Armstrong Store Fixture Corp | Partition structure with adjustable end member |
US3709371A (en) | 1971-03-19 | 1973-01-09 | Kraftco Corp | Display container |
US3751129A (en) | 1971-10-20 | 1973-08-07 | Wright Barry Corp | Card tray |
US3744865A (en) | 1972-03-27 | 1973-07-10 | Fountain Industries | Mounting base assembly for product cartridges |
DE2232398C3 (en) | 1972-07-01 | 1981-03-26 | Kurt 59939 Olsberg Baumann | Goods sales device for small parcels |
US3830169A (en) | 1972-08-21 | 1974-08-20 | Poster Products | Display table |
US3814490A (en) | 1972-10-12 | 1974-06-04 | Wright Barry Corp | File drawer follower block |
US4007841A (en) | 1973-02-12 | 1977-02-15 | Oscar Mayer & Co. Inc. | Article display rack |
US3815519A (en) | 1973-03-15 | 1974-06-11 | A Meyer | Snap-on adjustable sliding clip for shelf partitions |
US3836008A (en) | 1973-03-19 | 1974-09-17 | D Mraz | Wine rack |
DE2339799C3 (en) | 1973-08-06 | 1978-11-02 | Siemens Ag, 1000 Berlin Und 8000 Muenchen | Arrangement for coupling an armature to the contact bridge carrier in electromagnetic switching devices |
US3848745A (en) | 1973-08-08 | 1974-11-19 | J Smith | Tray unit |
US3870156A (en) | 1973-08-20 | 1975-03-11 | Brown Jug Inc | Modular wine bottle rack |
US3868021A (en) | 1973-10-09 | 1975-02-25 | Wilhelm Heinrich | Separator panel holder for display shelves |
US3942649A (en) | 1973-10-29 | 1976-03-09 | Rodney Dale Hugelman | Transfer mechanism |
US3923159A (en) | 1974-09-16 | 1975-12-02 | Lake Chemical Co | Product display and article dispensing device |
US4007853A (en) | 1975-08-01 | 1977-02-15 | Marvin Hofmann | Anti-theft dispensing rack |
JPS6010810B2 (en) | 1975-08-25 | 1985-03-20 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Rolling mill plate thickness control method |
US4122939A (en) | 1976-03-02 | 1978-10-31 | H. J. Langen & Sons Ltd. | Load transfer mechanism for packaging machine |
US4042096A (en) | 1976-03-15 | 1977-08-16 | Smith Daniel F | Shelf aid |
US4200201A (en) | 1977-01-24 | 1980-04-29 | Rod Pierce and Associates | Machine having module with carriage for advancing row of articles |
US4106668A (en) | 1977-02-14 | 1978-08-15 | Kayser-Roth Corporation | Device for displaying and storing articles |
US4378872A (en) | 1977-03-28 | 1983-04-05 | Si Handling Systems, Inc. | Article handling apparatus |
FR2385365A1 (en) | 1977-03-30 | 1978-10-27 | Corjon Jean Louis | Self service display sales unit for cigarettes - has packets pressure pushed forward towards opening by channel guided L-shaped packet sized weights |
US4130326A (en) | 1977-09-09 | 1978-12-19 | Display Corporation International | Cigarette merchandiser |
US4095861A (en) | 1977-09-12 | 1978-06-20 | Burroughs Corporation | Dust-proof cart |
DE2816547A1 (en) | 1978-04-17 | 1979-10-18 | Delbrouck Franz Fa | REMOVAL COMPARTMENT, IN PARTICULAR FOR REFRIGERATED FURNITURE |
JPS54145365A (en) | 1978-05-02 | 1979-11-13 | Honda Motor Co Ltd | Finish processing of valve lifter |
JPS5633414Y2 (en) | 1978-05-18 | 1981-08-07 | ||
DE2825724C3 (en) | 1978-06-12 | 1981-05-07 | Baumann, Kurt, 5787 Olsberg | Device for the storage and display of parcels of goods |
GB2027339B (en) | 1978-07-14 | 1982-08-18 | Corjon J L | Racks for dispensing articles |
US4160571A (en) | 1978-08-07 | 1979-07-10 | Alberto Bigotti | Shoe cabinet |
CA1110923A (en) | 1978-12-18 | 1981-10-20 | Robert E. Fox | Cutter wheel for tillage apparatus |
DE2915910C2 (en) | 1979-04-19 | 1983-01-20 | Display-Design GmbH für moderne Verkaufsförderungsmittel und Raumaussstattung, 6233 Kelkheim | Shelf divider system |
US4303162A (en) | 1979-08-13 | 1981-12-01 | The Mead Corporation | Forward feed merchandising device for soft drink bottles |
JPS5632855A (en) | 1979-08-27 | 1981-04-02 | Fujitsu Ltd | Control circuit for right of transmission |
JPS5671857U (en) | 1979-11-09 | 1981-06-13 | ||
JPS5671587A (en) | 1979-11-14 | 1981-06-15 | Sankyo Kogyo Kk | Producing machine for screen of geometric form |
US4300693A (en) | 1979-11-15 | 1981-11-17 | The Mead Corporation | Automatic feed device for merchandise display |
US4331243A (en) | 1979-12-03 | 1982-05-25 | Market Innovators, Inc. | Gravity flow rack |
US4308974A (en) | 1980-02-29 | 1982-01-05 | Jones Linda M | Tampon dispener |
US4351439A (en) | 1980-03-11 | 1982-09-28 | Leggett & Platt, Incorporated | Merchandise display device |
US4314700A (en) | 1980-10-03 | 1982-02-09 | Dylag Kenneth C | Card counting prevention apparatus for blackjack |
CH648690A5 (en) | 1980-10-14 | 1985-03-29 | Balzers Hochvakuum | CATHODE ARRANGEMENT FOR SPRAYING MATERIAL FROM A TARGET IN A CATHODE SPRAYING SYSTEM. |
US4364481A (en) | 1980-10-20 | 1982-12-21 | Bristol-Myers Company | Shelf organizer |
US4476985A (en) | 1981-05-18 | 1984-10-16 | Rockford Products Corporation | Screw and bolt tray displayer |
US4437572A (en) | 1981-06-08 | 1984-03-20 | Sears, Roebuck And Co. | Shelf retainer |
US4457512A (en) | 1981-06-09 | 1984-07-03 | Jax, Ltd. | Dealing shoe |
FR2508300A1 (en) | 1981-06-26 | 1982-12-31 | Chaumard Yvette | APPARATUS FOR STORING AND DISTRIBUTING PARALLELEPIPEDIC OBJECTS AND PACKETS |
US4454948A (en) | 1981-11-23 | 1984-06-19 | The Mead Corporation | Gravity feed display unit |
JPS58129875A (en) | 1981-12-25 | 1983-08-03 | Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd | Picture discriminator |
DE3204158A1 (en) | 1982-02-06 | 1983-08-11 | Dr. Karl Thomae Gmbh, 7950 Biberach | "SUBSTITUTED DIBENZODIAZEPINONE, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND MEDICINAL PRODUCTS CONTAINING THESE COMPOUNDS" |
DE3211880A1 (en) | 1982-03-31 | 1983-10-06 | Hans Helmut Valkieser | Shelf unit for accommodating rows of packages |
US4458960A (en) | 1982-05-03 | 1984-07-10 | King-Seeley Thermos Co. | Ice body supply delivery control |
FR2526338B1 (en) | 1982-05-06 | 1985-07-12 | Corjon Jean Louis | IMPROVEMENTS TO DEVICES FOR THE PRESENTATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF PARALLELEPIPEDIC OBJECTS |
US4589349A (en) | 1982-05-14 | 1986-05-20 | The Mead Corporation | Extendible shelf |
US4467927A (en) | 1982-08-12 | 1984-08-28 | Walter Nathan | Molded tray for display stands |
US4620489A (en) | 1982-09-07 | 1986-11-04 | The Kent Corporation | Extendible merchandise shelving display |
US4482066A (en) | 1982-09-24 | 1984-11-13 | Dykstra Donald P | Storage rack with an extendible shelf structure |
US4588093A (en) | 1982-12-20 | 1986-05-13 | Field Frank P | Merchandise display device |
US4463854A (en) | 1983-01-17 | 1984-08-07 | Mackenzie David D | Book support assembly |
FR2540336B1 (en) | 1983-02-03 | 1986-08-08 | Electromeca Sa | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE MOVEMENTS OF A WORKPIECE AND THEIR USE IN A HAY COLLECTION MACHINE |
US4487024A (en) | 1983-03-16 | 1984-12-11 | Clawson Machine Company, Inc. | Thermoelectric ice cube maker |
DE8308485U1 (en) | 1983-03-22 | 1983-09-08 | The Howard Marlboro Group, 10018 New York, N.Y. | SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION TO RECEIVE EXHIBITIONS GOODS TO BE OFFERED |
JPS59218113A (en) | 1983-05-26 | 1984-12-08 | トーイン株式会社 | Commodity display case |
US4685574A (en) | 1984-01-10 | 1987-08-11 | Visual Marketing Inc. | Shelf-supported expandable gravity feed system |
US4811999A (en) | 1984-02-02 | 1989-03-14 | The Stanley Works | Cabinet with pivoted locking outrigger |
DE8426651U1 (en) | 1984-02-10 | 1985-02-07 | Krieger, Horst, 3500 Kassel | Tray for the presentation of goods packages arranged one behind the other within easy reach |
US4488653A (en) | 1984-03-12 | 1984-12-18 | Paul Belokin | Magnetically mounted shelf divider |
US4610491A (en) | 1984-07-16 | 1986-09-09 | Freeman Lowell J | Hinged barrier for a refrigerator shelf |
US4660477A (en) | 1984-08-17 | 1987-04-28 | Haworth, Inc. | Slidable work surface |
KR880000334B1 (en) | 1984-09-08 | 1988-03-20 | 레이랜드, 배히클스 리미티드 | Drive line for atrack-laying vehicle |
JPS6171592U (en) | 1984-09-11 | 1986-05-15 | ||
JPS6171592A (en) | 1984-09-13 | 1986-04-12 | 松下電工株式会社 | Device for starting discharge lamp |
US4629072A (en) | 1984-12-17 | 1986-12-16 | P.O.P. Displays, Inc. | Apparatus for storing and dispensing stacked articles |
JPS622945A (en) | 1985-06-28 | 1987-01-08 | 加川 秀男 | Up-and-down lifting and falling apparatus of moving bed bathtub vehicle |
DE8520125U1 (en) | 1985-07-12 | 1986-01-30 | Formtechnik GmbH Spritzguss und Werkzeugbau, 6149 Fürth | Shelf insert |
US4651883A (en) | 1985-07-29 | 1987-03-24 | Leggett & Platt, Incorporated | Gravity feed pusher merchandiser |
JPH0687820B2 (en) | 1985-09-09 | 1994-11-09 | 株式会社シノベ製作所 | Display shelf for products in standard containers |
US4615276A (en) | 1985-09-16 | 1986-10-07 | Garabedian Aram G | Shelf divider assembly |
DE3540735A1 (en) | 1985-11-16 | 1987-05-21 | Henkel Kgaa | DEVICE FOR PRESENTING SALES ITEMS |
US4768661A (en) | 1985-11-21 | 1988-09-06 | Armstrong Store Fixture Corporation | Binning and banding structure and clips therefor |
US4729481A (en) | 1986-01-10 | 1988-03-08 | Pcr Company | Apparatus for advancing shelved goods |
US4742936A (en) | 1986-01-15 | 1988-05-10 | The Display Equation, Inc. | Dispensing device with numerical indicator for inventory control |
US4679654A (en) | 1986-02-12 | 1987-07-14 | Lu Li Hsing | Descending life-escaping device specially for a high building use |
US4682825A (en) | 1986-02-24 | 1987-07-28 | Frank Mayer & Associates | Security device for point-of-sale display rack and primarily store shelving |
US4679684A (en) | 1986-03-03 | 1987-07-14 | L. M. Becker & Co., Inc. | Multiple chamber automated vending machine |
JPH0638735B2 (en) | 1986-06-17 | 1994-05-25 | 日本製粉株式会社 | PETFOOD WITH MULTILAYER STRUCTURE |
EP0251199B1 (en) | 1986-07-01 | 1990-10-03 | Jean Guigan | Storage and distribution device for articles |
US4762235A (en) | 1986-07-09 | 1988-08-09 | Sara Lee Corporation | Integrated modular store fixture system and a tray and header therefor |
US4706821A (en) | 1986-07-17 | 1987-11-17 | Jockey International, Inc. | Merchandise display and dispensing device |
JPH0824055B2 (en) | 1986-07-22 | 1996-03-06 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Fuel cell power generation system |
US4744490A (en) | 1986-08-25 | 1988-05-17 | Fawn Engineering Corp. | Table or like vending machine with customer operated anti-theft product delivery drawer |
US4730741A (en) | 1986-10-16 | 1988-03-15 | The Niven Marketing Group | Pressure-feed tray system |
US4762236A (en) | 1986-10-16 | 1988-08-09 | The Niven Marketing Group | Adjustable tray dispensing apparatus |
DE3640913A1 (en) | 1986-11-29 | 1988-06-01 | Werner Schenk | COMPONENT KIT FOR A PRODUCT PRESENTATION COMPARTMENT |
US4775058A (en) | 1986-12-15 | 1988-10-04 | Jameson Pharmaceutical Corp. | Display shelf organizer |
BE906083A (en) | 1986-12-30 | 1987-04-16 | Promo Ct Nv | Item-presentation equipment in succession - has spring component thrusting along track and against stop |
US4705175A (en) | 1987-02-17 | 1987-11-10 | Sara Lee Corporation | Display and pull-out tray assemblies for integrated modular store fixture system |
US4790037A (en) | 1987-05-13 | 1988-12-13 | Air-Lok Pool Covers, Inc. | Swimming pool cover assembly |
FR2617385A1 (en) | 1987-07-02 | 1989-01-06 | Normandie Conditionnement | Modular device for displaying and automatically dispensing articles |
JPS6417033A (en) | 1987-07-10 | 1989-01-20 | Minolta Camera Kk | Automatic dimming system flash device |
US4881787A (en) | 1987-08-05 | 1989-11-21 | H. King And Associates | Package storage, display and dispensing apparatus |
US4861121A (en) | 1987-10-01 | 1989-08-29 | Lam-Wood Products Inc. | Space efficient cabinet for housing a computer work station |
US4776472A (en) | 1987-10-09 | 1988-10-11 | Brand Manufacturing Corp. | Bakery display shelves |
US4836390A (en) | 1987-10-15 | 1989-06-06 | Polvere Dennis J | Rack for dispensing articles |
US4944414A (en) | 1987-10-30 | 1990-07-31 | Fawn Engineering Corp. | Shelf assembly for vending tubular products |
US4907707A (en) | 1988-04-04 | 1990-03-13 | Oscar Mayer Foods Corporation | Merchandiser assembly |
US5012936A (en) | 1988-04-04 | 1991-05-07 | Oscar Meyer Foods Corporation | Merchandiser assembly |
US5123546A (en) | 1988-04-04 | 1992-06-23 | Oscar Mayer Foods Corporation | Merchandiser assembly |
US4830201A (en) | 1988-04-11 | 1989-05-16 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Spring-urged shelf divider system |
US4828144A (en) | 1988-04-18 | 1989-05-09 | Garrick Clayton G | Dispenser for permanent wave rods and end papers |
US4887737A (en) | 1988-06-10 | 1989-12-19 | Thomas A. Schutz Co., Inc. | Dispensing device with sensory alert |
US4809856A (en) | 1988-06-23 | 1989-03-07 | Spacesaver Corporation | Shelf divider |
JPH0211063A (en) | 1988-06-29 | 1990-01-16 | Canon Inc | Picture processor |
US4915460A (en) | 1988-06-30 | 1990-04-10 | Nook Thomas J | Security system for dispensing racks |
US4901869A (en) | 1988-08-26 | 1990-02-20 | Hawkinson Rodney B | Merchandise display rack of variable size |
FR2637792B1 (en) | 1988-10-17 | 1991-01-11 | Lauterbach Jacques | APPARATUS FOR STORING AND DISPENSING OBJECTS SUCH AS, IN PARTICULAR PACKS OF CIGARETTES, BOXES AND THE LIKE, OF PARALLELEPIPEDIC OR CYLINDRICAL FORM |
US4899668A (en) | 1988-12-15 | 1990-02-13 | Southern Imperial, Inc. | Shelf divider |
US4883169A (en) | 1988-12-19 | 1989-11-28 | Flanagan Jr Richard E | Portable receptacle for returnable beverage containers |
US4934645A (en) | 1989-03-20 | 1990-06-19 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Shelving assembly |
US5085154A (en) | 1989-05-19 | 1992-02-04 | Marlboro Marketing, Inc. | Expandable tray assembly |
US4901853A (en) | 1989-05-26 | 1990-02-20 | Avantek, Inc. | Substrate transport box |
GB2234890B (en) | 1989-07-14 | 1992-07-15 | P M Crafts Limited | Shelving systems |
JPH0636774B2 (en) | 1989-10-30 | 1994-05-18 | トーイン株式会社 | Product display case |
US5161702A (en) | 1989-11-14 | 1992-11-10 | Thomas A. Schutz Company | Display device |
US5027957A (en) | 1989-11-14 | 1991-07-02 | Thomas A. Schultz Company, Inc. | Display device |
JPH0638735Y2 (en) | 1989-12-18 | 1994-10-12 | 河西工業株式会社 | Garnish for door trim |
US5178258A (en) | 1990-01-25 | 1993-01-12 | Smalley Alfred E | Inertial conveyor system |
US5088607A (en) | 1990-03-12 | 1992-02-18 | Sara Lee Corporation | Pull-out tray assembly for an integrated modular store fixture system |
WO1991015141A1 (en) | 1990-04-06 | 1991-10-17 | Gerald Yablans | Multi-package adjustable shelf display dispenser |
US5190186A (en) | 1990-04-06 | 1993-03-02 | P.O.P. Displays, Inc. | Multi-package adjustable shelf display dispenser |
FR2661324B1 (en) | 1990-04-25 | 1994-09-16 | Didier Bernardin | DISPLAY OF OBJECTS IN A LINE. |
WO1991017939A1 (en) | 1990-05-11 | 1991-11-28 | Gerald Yablans | Structure and method of making an article dispensing apparatus |
US5169221A (en) | 1990-09-04 | 1992-12-08 | General Devices Co., Inc. | Pivotable drawer slide mount with pivot controlling guide slot |
US5183166A (en) | 1991-01-07 | 1993-02-02 | Belokin Jr Paul | Foldable shelf display |
US5138299A (en) | 1991-03-07 | 1992-08-11 | Honeywell Inc. | Showcase alarm system |
US5255802A (en) | 1991-03-22 | 1993-10-26 | Padco, Incorporated | Merchandise display system |
US5082125A (en) | 1991-03-27 | 1992-01-21 | Wright Tool Company | Partitioning device |
US5151684A (en) * | 1991-04-12 | 1992-09-29 | Johnsen Edward L | Electronic inventory label and security apparatus |
US5148927A (en) | 1991-08-07 | 1992-09-22 | Fast Industries Inc. | Pin mount shelf divider |
US5295592A (en) | 1991-09-11 | 1994-03-22 | Thorne Ross T | Article dispenser |
US5269597A (en) | 1991-10-23 | 1993-12-14 | Thomas F. Parker & Associates, Inc. | Dispensing rack |
US5203463A (en) | 1991-12-09 | 1993-04-20 | Gold Steven K | Adjustable product display and dispensing unit |
US5215199A (en) | 1992-01-16 | 1993-06-01 | Pedro Bejarano | Rack for supporting items such as bottles |
CA2117649A1 (en) | 1992-03-04 | 1993-09-16 | Francis Alfred Carroll | Gravity feed merchandising apparatus |
CA2066294A1 (en) | 1992-04-16 | 1993-10-17 | Larry L. North | Fried product dispensing apparatus |
US5265738A (en) | 1992-05-14 | 1993-11-30 | P.O.P. Displays, Inc. | Shelf display dispenser for packaged merchandise |
US5253782A (en) | 1992-05-20 | 1993-10-19 | Paul A. Wiebel | Article dispensing apparatus |
US5240126A (en) | 1992-05-29 | 1993-08-31 | The Gillette Company | Dispensing rack apparatus |
US5199599A (en) | 1992-06-19 | 1993-04-06 | Shade Michael W | Apparatus for dispensing articles |
JPH0638735A (en) | 1992-07-22 | 1994-02-15 | Dainippon Seiki:Kk | Mic data processor in dilution test on agar plate |
US5307941A (en) | 1992-07-24 | 1994-05-03 | Siegal Burton L | File folder conveyor |
DE9211985U1 (en) | 1992-09-05 | 1994-01-13 | Scintilla Ag, Solothurn | Product presentation system |
US5351839A (en) | 1992-09-28 | 1994-10-04 | Decision Point Marketing, Inc. | Vertically adjustable pusher point of purchase display |
US5332105A (en) | 1992-10-13 | 1994-07-26 | John Stanfield | Portable dish rack |
US5316154A (en) | 1992-11-04 | 1994-05-31 | Hajec Jr John W | Rack for storing and dispensing plastic oil containers |
US5371867A (en) | 1992-11-10 | 1994-12-06 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method of using small addresses to access any guest zone in a large memory |
FR2699380B1 (en) | 1992-12-23 | 1995-03-10 | George Sa | Display for shelf. |
WO1994015859A1 (en) | 1993-01-04 | 1994-07-21 | Shaw Thomas J | Automatic pill dispensing apparatus |
US5413229A (en) | 1993-02-03 | 1995-05-09 | Zuberbuhler; H. Richard | Shelf allocation and management system |
US5390802A (en) | 1993-02-12 | 1995-02-21 | Hmg Worldwide In-Store Marketing, Inc. | Shelf assembly for gondola display structure |
WO1994022487A1 (en) | 1993-03-26 | 1994-10-13 | Thomas Jefferson University | Use of a col 1a1 mini-gene construct to inhibit collagen synthesis |
US5469976A (en) | 1993-04-30 | 1995-11-28 | Burchell; James R. | Shelf allocation and management system |
US5456370A (en) | 1993-08-11 | 1995-10-10 | Colgate-Palmolive Company | Display rack |
US5407085A (en) | 1993-08-11 | 1995-04-18 | Colgate-Palmolive Company | Display rack |
US5464105A (en) | 1993-08-25 | 1995-11-07 | Deluxe Craft Manufacturing Co. | Multiple item shelving display system |
GB2281289A (en) | 1993-08-26 | 1995-03-01 | Ppe Ltd | A display shelf/case divider system |
US5341945A (en) | 1993-08-31 | 1994-08-30 | Burke Gibson, Inc. | Shelf divider system |
US5330058A (en) | 1993-09-17 | 1994-07-19 | Everett Rice | Open-frame rack for self-service vending of evergreens |
US5381908A (en) | 1993-09-20 | 1995-01-17 | All Stock Displays Inc. | Organizer for grocery shelves |
US5392025A (en) | 1993-09-24 | 1995-02-21 | Intermark Corporation | Electronic security system for display cabinets |
US5415297A (en) | 1993-10-26 | 1995-05-16 | Lynk, Inc. | Storage rack for optical disc storage cases |
GB2283407B (en) | 1993-11-01 | 1997-10-29 | Ppe Ltd | Adjustable shelf assembly for merchandising display stand |
GB9322492D0 (en) | 1993-11-01 | 1993-12-22 | Ppe Ltd | Merchandising display system |
US5450969A (en) | 1993-11-08 | 1995-09-19 | Gamon International, Inc. | Shelving display |
US5385266A (en) | 1993-11-30 | 1995-01-31 | Pate; Ronald | Anti-theft device for coin operated newspaper dispenser |
US5485928A (en) | 1993-12-01 | 1996-01-23 | T. J. Hale Company | Merchandise display rack |
US5469975A (en) | 1993-12-27 | 1995-11-28 | Fajnsztajn; Aleksander | Mount for use with a postal sorting tray |
CN1066622C (en) | 1994-01-14 | 2001-06-06 | 希尔施手镯有限公司 | Securing device to prevent unauthorised removal of merchandise stacked in apparatuses |
US5366099A (en) | 1994-02-02 | 1994-11-22 | Consumer Promotions, Inc. | Adjustable display unit |
US5509573A (en) | 1994-03-23 | 1996-04-23 | Campoli; William J. | Aseptic dispensing system |
US5542552A (en) | 1994-04-04 | 1996-08-06 | P.O.P. Displays, Inc. | Adjustable display and dispenser rack |
GB2290077B (en) | 1994-06-10 | 1997-11-05 | Ppe Ltd | Shelf product pusher |
WO1995034334A1 (en) | 1994-06-15 | 1995-12-21 | Interventional Research Technologies, Inc. | Locking device for syringe or like instrument |
US5905653A (en) | 1994-07-14 | 1999-05-18 | Omnicell Technologies, Inc. | Methods and devices for dispensing pharmaceutical and medical supply items |
US5531159A (en) | 1994-08-19 | 1996-07-02 | Universal Display & Fixtures Company | Pull-out drop down shelf structure |
US5562217A (en) | 1994-10-31 | 1996-10-08 | The Mead Corporation | Pusher unit for dispensing merchandise |
US5605237A (en) | 1994-12-14 | 1997-02-25 | Anthony's Manufacturing Company, Inc. | Product advance mechanism |
US5848593A (en) | 1994-12-16 | 1998-12-15 | Diebold, Incorporated | System for dispensing a kit of associated medical items |
GB2297241A (en) | 1995-01-12 | 1996-07-31 | Artform Int Ltd | Pressure feed device for shelves |
US5829631A (en) | 1995-01-24 | 1998-11-03 | Algonquin Industries, Inc. | Apparatus for dispensing tickets, cards and the like from a stack |
US5753897A (en) | 1995-01-24 | 1998-05-19 | Algonquin Industries, Inc. | Apparatus for dispensing cards having an integrated circuit chip |
US5611456A (en) | 1995-01-24 | 1997-03-18 | Algonquin Industries Inc. | Apparatus for dispensing tickets, cards and the like |
US5857588A (en) | 1995-01-24 | 1999-01-12 | Algonquin Industries, Inc. | Apparatus for dispensing tickets, cards and the like from a stack |
US6164491A (en) | 1995-03-15 | 2000-12-26 | L&P Property Management Company | Pneumatic product vending system and product loader therefor |
USD378888S (en) | 1995-03-27 | 1997-04-22 | Sunwood AB | Wine-rack |
US5638963A (en) | 1995-03-29 | 1997-06-17 | Laurel Graphics & Fabrication Company | Product management apparatus and method |
US5613621A (en) | 1995-04-24 | 1997-03-25 | Gervasi; Paul | Inventory control shelf aid dispensing device |
JP3022248B2 (en) | 1995-04-28 | 2000-03-15 | 株式会社アミックス | Product display removal unit |
US5634564A (en) | 1995-06-13 | 1997-06-03 | The Mead Corporation | Pusher device for dispensing articles |
DE29510232U1 (en) | 1995-06-23 | 1996-01-04 | Nowack, Michael, 80798 München | Self-service shelving system, especially for bread and baked goods |
US5649363A (en) | 1995-06-28 | 1997-07-22 | Vulcan Spring & Mfg. Co. | Method of manufacturing printed springs |
DE19529926C2 (en) | 1995-08-01 | 1997-07-31 | Angelika Weimer | Device for closing shelves with a sight glass cover |
US5873489A (en) | 1995-08-25 | 1999-02-23 | Matsushita Refrigeration Company | Commodities storing apparatus of vending machine |
US5670778A (en) | 1995-08-31 | 1997-09-23 | Kardex Systems, Inc. | Presence detector for mobile storage systems |
DE69632262D1 (en) | 1995-10-17 | 2004-05-27 | Checkmate Internat Pyt Ltd | SHELF SYSTEM |
US5797515A (en) | 1995-10-18 | 1998-08-25 | Adds, Inc. | Method for controlling a drug dispensing system |
US5615780A (en) | 1995-10-31 | 1997-04-01 | Nimetz; Steven A. | Full-access, non-gravity dependent, jar storage rack |
US5690038B1 (en) | 1995-11-13 | 2000-07-04 | William Merit | Method and apparatus for selective engagement of shelf separation structures |
JP2743885B2 (en) | 1995-11-14 | 1998-04-22 | コクヨ株式会社 | Display device |
US5665304A (en) | 1995-12-12 | 1997-09-09 | Warner-Lambert Company | Display unit |
NL1001897C2 (en) | 1995-12-14 | 1997-06-17 | Geel Groep B V Van | Mobile filing cabinet. |
US5730320A (en) | 1996-02-09 | 1998-03-24 | Melco Wire Products Co. | Product dispensing apparatus |
US5826731A (en) | 1996-03-11 | 1998-10-27 | Dardashti; Shahriar | Knock-down bottle rack |
US5990938A (en) * | 1996-03-11 | 1999-11-23 | Bern; Brett L. | Showcase security system |
US5673801A (en) | 1996-03-25 | 1997-10-07 | Markson Rosenthal & Company | Shelf organizer display |
US5740944A (en) | 1996-04-01 | 1998-04-21 | Crawford; Arthur D. | Sock storage and dispenser |
JP2948152B2 (en) | 1996-08-23 | 1999-09-13 | キリンビバレッジ株式会社 | Vending machine product ejection device |
US5746328A (en) | 1996-08-23 | 1998-05-05 | Decision Point Marketing, Inc. | Pegboard-mountable adjustable merchandising rack |
USD386363S (en) | 1996-09-09 | 1997-11-18 | Shahriar Dardashti | Wine bottle rack |
US5797487A (en) | 1996-09-27 | 1998-08-25 | Young; Alan | Lockable compact disk storage apparatus |
US5906283A (en) | 1996-10-30 | 1999-05-25 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Product pusher |
JPH10137082A (en) | 1996-11-14 | 1998-05-26 | Kao Corp | Article housing tool |
JPH10151047A (en) | 1996-11-22 | 1998-06-09 | Toppan Printing Co Ltd | Vertical merchandise take-out type dispenser |
JPH10159415A (en) | 1996-12-03 | 1998-06-16 | Nippon Dry Chem Co Ltd | Burglary prevention device for showcase |
US5839588A (en) | 1996-12-26 | 1998-11-24 | Hawkinson; Terry B. | Track system for feeding of product at points of sale |
JPH10211063A (en) | 1997-01-31 | 1998-08-11 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Display shelf for show case |
CN1251501A (en) | 1997-02-13 | 2000-04-26 | 赫尔曼米勒有限公司 | Shelf with movable barrier |
US5765390A (en) | 1997-05-12 | 1998-06-16 | Maytag Corporation | Refrigerator dairy compartment assembly |
US5803276A (en) | 1997-05-27 | 1998-09-08 | Vogler; Michael N. | Adjustable shelf divider |
US5853235A (en) | 1997-05-30 | 1998-12-29 | Barnes; Harry W. | Burglar-proof jewelry case |
US5878895A (en) | 1997-06-30 | 1999-03-09 | Newell Operating Company | Front loading package display system |
US6076670A (en) | 1997-07-10 | 2000-06-20 | P.O.P. Displays, Inc. | Tooth brush tray with canopy |
US5855283A (en) | 1997-07-31 | 1999-01-05 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Product display |
US5855281A (en) | 1997-07-31 | 1999-01-05 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Product display system |
US6082558A (en) | 1997-08-28 | 2000-07-04 | L&P Property Management Company | Shelf assembly with pusher having memory characteristic and method of use |
US5873473A (en) | 1997-09-16 | 1999-02-23 | Konstant Products, Inc. | Release mechanism for carts, pallets or unit load storage systems |
AU9603698A (en) | 1997-10-10 | 1999-05-03 | L&P Property Management Company | Shelf assembly |
US6513677B1 (en) | 1997-10-14 | 2003-02-04 | Gross-Given Manufacturing Company | Apparatus and method for vending products |
US5971204A (en) | 1997-10-17 | 1999-10-26 | Rehrig Pacific Company | Bottle dispenser |
US5918954A (en) | 1997-11-05 | 1999-07-06 | Philip Morris Incorporated | Limited access sales apparatus |
US6142317A (en) * | 1997-11-12 | 2000-11-07 | Merl; Milton J. | Gravity feed shelving system with track and pusher |
US6041720A (en) | 1997-11-13 | 2000-03-28 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system |
CN1285307C (en) | 1997-11-28 | 2006-11-22 | 河淳株式会社 | Goods display unit |
US5992653A (en) | 1997-12-18 | 1999-11-30 | J & J Snack Foods Corp. | Display and dispensing pack |
JP3743153B2 (en) | 1998-02-26 | 2006-02-08 | 富士電機リテイルシステムズ株式会社 | Merchandise storage and dispensing device for vending machines |
US5938306A (en) | 1998-03-03 | 1999-08-17 | Sauder Woodworking Co. | Cabinet and door assembly |
US6697103B1 (en) | 1998-03-19 | 2004-02-24 | Dennis Sunga Fernandez | Integrated network for monitoring remote objects |
US7048131B2 (en) | 1998-04-09 | 2006-05-23 | Gay Kenneth F | Open frame shelf assembly |
FR2778075B1 (en) | 1998-04-30 | 2000-07-21 | Bourjois | DEVICE FOR PRESENTING AND DISTRIBUTING A PLURALITY OF PRODUCTS |
JP3163060B2 (en) | 1998-05-08 | 2001-05-08 | エヌカント株式会社 | Roller slider for product display |
US6129218A (en) | 1998-05-11 | 2000-10-10 | Target Brands, Inc. | Merchandise display system |
JP4121099B2 (en) | 1998-06-03 | 2008-07-16 | 河淳株式会社 | Product display unit |
JPH11346879A (en) | 1998-06-05 | 1999-12-21 | Kawajun Kk | Commodity display shelf |
KR20000002286A (en) | 1998-06-18 | 2000-01-15 | 김충섭 | Oxazinyl derivatives having superior bacterocidal activity |
EP0979628B1 (en) | 1998-08-12 | 2004-04-21 | Heinrich J. Kesseböhmer Draht- und Metallwarenfabrik | Dispenser for articles |
AU749168B2 (en) | 1998-08-19 | 2002-06-20 | Fisher & Paykel Appliances Limited | Door opening and closing system |
FR2783144B1 (en) | 1998-09-15 | 2000-12-01 | Financ Internationale Sitour F | PUSH-BUTTON DEVICE FOR PRESENTING ARTICLES ON A SHELF |
US5987818A (en) * | 1998-10-21 | 1999-11-23 | Dabideen; Pooran | Remotely controlled door locking and opening system |
NL1010662C2 (en) | 1998-11-26 | 2000-05-30 | Dsi The Netherlands B V | Showcase. |
JP2000157378A (en) | 1998-11-30 | 2000-06-13 | Fuji Electric Co Ltd | Product exhibit rack device for showcase |
US6505774B1 (en) | 1998-12-09 | 2003-01-14 | Miti Manufacturing Company | Automated fee collection and parking ticket dispensing machine |
US6068135A (en) | 1998-12-21 | 2000-05-30 | Showall, Inc. | Merchandise display panel with lockable display card |
US6357606B1 (en) | 1999-02-02 | 2002-03-19 | Hmg Worldwide In-Store Marketing, Inc. | Modular self-adjusting merchandise display system |
US6193085B1 (en) | 1999-02-04 | 2001-02-27 | Philip Morris, Inc. | Dispensing rack |
DE29902688U1 (en) | 1999-02-16 | 1999-07-08 | Voßhenrich, Udo, 32108 Bad Salzuflen | Product presentation system |
USD445615S1 (en) | 1999-02-23 | 2001-07-31 | Burke Display Systems, Inc. | Slide member |
US6867685B1 (en) | 1999-05-10 | 2005-03-15 | Star Lock Systems, Inc. | Electro-mechanical lock assembly |
US6290074B1 (en) | 1999-05-24 | 2001-09-18 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Storage and display rack and shelf therefor |
JP4397067B2 (en) | 1999-06-10 | 2010-01-13 | 河淳株式会社 | Product display |
US6173845B1 (en) | 1999-06-14 | 2001-01-16 | Display Industries, Llc. | Beverage display rack with head locking keyway |
US6196416B1 (en) | 1999-06-30 | 2001-03-06 | Asahi Seiko Usa, Inc. | Device for dispensing articles of value and magazine therefor |
US6176558B1 (en) | 1999-07-09 | 2001-01-23 | Schutz International Inc. | Cassette display unit |
US6351964B1 (en) | 2000-06-28 | 2002-03-05 | Specialty Equipment Companies, Inc. | Reach-in refrigerated cooler |
US6311852B1 (en) | 1999-08-23 | 2001-11-06 | Darko Company, Inc. | Merchandising fixture and shelf divider system therefor |
US6889854B2 (en) | 1999-08-24 | 2005-05-10 | Burke Display Systems, Inc. | Snap-fit adjustable display system |
US6772888B2 (en) | 1999-08-24 | 2004-08-10 | Burke Display Systems, Inc. | Adjustable forward feeding display system |
US6564121B1 (en) | 1999-09-22 | 2003-05-13 | Telepharmacy Solutions, Inc. | Systems and methods for drug dispensing |
US6234328B1 (en) | 1999-09-24 | 2001-05-22 | Ndr Corporation | Adjustable shelf system |
JP2001104117A (en) | 1999-10-08 | 2001-04-17 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Open showcase |
FR2801772B1 (en) | 1999-12-02 | 2002-02-08 | Plasti Rapid Soc | DEVICE FOR PRESENTING PRODUCTS FOR SALE |
US6227385B1 (en) | 1999-12-03 | 2001-05-08 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Shelf tray system |
US6347710B1 (en) | 1999-12-13 | 2002-02-19 | Pitney Bowes Inc. | Storage rack for storing sorted mailpieces |
US6578735B1 (en) | 2000-02-02 | 2003-06-17 | Ewald Mothwurf | Method and an apparatus for promoting a product or brand |
JP2001240225A (en) | 2000-02-29 | 2001-09-04 | Kid:Kk | Method and device for installing roller in display rack or the like |
US6382431B1 (en) | 2000-03-03 | 2002-05-07 | Burke Display Systems, Inc. | Shelf management system |
US6401942B1 (en) | 2000-03-06 | 2002-06-11 | Michael P. Eckert | Transformable display and holding device |
US6484891B2 (en) | 2000-03-24 | 2002-11-26 | Burke Display Systems, Inc. | Adjustable track system for modular display systems |
DE20005833U1 (en) | 2000-03-29 | 2000-07-06 | Hakemann, Fritz, 49424 Goldenstedt | Sales counter with a closable, operable closure |
US6471081B1 (en) | 2000-04-20 | 2002-10-29 | Raywood C. Weiler | Adjustable bookend |
WO2003074396A1 (en) | 2002-03-04 | 2003-09-12 | Alexandre Maldonado | Adjustable push forward dispensing mechanism |
SE517206C2 (en) | 2000-07-07 | 2002-05-07 | Hl Display Ab | Device at a product support |
US6389991B1 (en) | 2000-07-19 | 2002-05-21 | ALBUMS DF LTéE | Display device |
EP1174060A1 (en) | 2000-07-21 | 2002-01-23 | Warner-Lambert Company | Product carrier tray with support member |
US20020088765A1 (en) | 2000-09-20 | 2002-07-11 | Waldron Merle M. | Merchandise display |
FR2814526B1 (en) | 2000-09-22 | 2002-12-27 | Tonnellerie Baron | CONSTRUCTION FOR SUPPORTING CONTAINERS OF CYLINDRICAL SYMMETRY |
US6651827B1 (en) | 2000-11-02 | 2003-11-25 | Berol Corporation | Brochure holder |
US6428123B1 (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2002-08-06 | Midwest Quality Gloves, Inc. | Product display |
US6755323B2 (en) | 2000-11-22 | 2004-06-29 | Accu-Sort Systems, Inc. | Apparatus for dispensing articles |
KR200223463Y1 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2001-05-15 | 주식회사퍼시스 | sub-table for a monitor |
US6851770B2 (en) | 2000-11-29 | 2005-02-08 | Fausion Associates, Inc. | Display case security apparatus having linear actuator |
US6409027B1 (en) | 2001-03-09 | 2002-06-25 | Oneida Ltd. | Dispensing tray for display console |
WO2003013316A2 (en) | 2001-08-10 | 2003-02-20 | Mechtronics Corporation | Pusher-type display system |
US20020148794A1 (en) | 2001-04-11 | 2002-10-17 | Marihugh Daniel W. | Merchandise display tray with spring-loaded pusher plate |
JP2002306289A (en) | 2001-04-18 | 2002-10-22 | Okamura Corp | Book rack for book, etc. |
JP2002315660A (en) | 2001-04-24 | 2002-10-29 | Okamura Corp | Merchandise display rack |
US6886699B2 (en) | 2001-10-15 | 2005-05-03 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising system |
WO2006019947A2 (en) | 2004-07-16 | 2006-02-23 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising system |
US20080156752A1 (en) | 2001-04-26 | 2008-07-03 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising System |
EP1453402A2 (en) | 2001-04-26 | 2004-09-08 | DCI Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising system |
US6464089B1 (en) | 2001-05-11 | 2002-10-15 | Vulcan Spring & Manufacturing Company | Adjustable spring-driven pusher device for a merchandise dispenser |
US7152536B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2006-12-26 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system |
US6964235B2 (en) | 2001-05-17 | 2005-11-15 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system |
US6390307B1 (en) | 2001-05-18 | 2002-05-21 | Stan Stelter | Secure holding system for standards |
RU2192770C1 (en) | 2001-05-23 | 2002-11-20 | Общество с ограниченной ответственностью частное охранное предприятие "ФОРВАРД" | Demonstration stand |
US6405880B1 (en) | 2001-07-02 | 2002-06-18 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Rack merchandising system |
ATE339134T1 (en) | 2001-07-09 | 2006-10-15 | Kleerex Patents Ltd | SHELF MANAGEMENT SYSTEM |
US6523664B2 (en) | 2001-07-25 | 2003-02-25 | B-O-F Corporation | Rollers and track for gravity fed shelving apparatus |
US6538879B2 (en) | 2001-07-31 | 2003-03-25 | Lite-On Enclosure Inc. | Assembly frame of computer housing capable of rotating and positioning |
US6527127B2 (en) | 2001-08-06 | 2003-03-04 | Tablex Inc. | Universal shelving |
US6520405B1 (en) | 2001-09-13 | 2003-02-18 | Lorenzo C. Braxter | Mailbox lock |
US20030057167A1 (en) | 2001-09-19 | 2003-03-27 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising system |
MXPA02009324A (en) | 2001-09-25 | 2003-09-05 | L & P Property Management Co | Product display and fronting assembly. |
US6523703B1 (en) | 2001-09-26 | 2003-02-25 | Display Industries, Llc. | Pusher mechanism for a merchandising display shelf |
US6992585B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2006-01-31 | Rameez Saleh | Security system incorporating a single modular unit motion sensor |
US6651828B2 (en) | 2001-10-05 | 2003-11-25 | U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Brands Inc. | Display apparatus with integrated dividers |
US20040233284A1 (en) | 2001-10-09 | 2004-11-25 | Vehicle Enhancement Systems, Inc. | Apparatus and methods for providing surveillance data concerning a scene of interest to a user located at a remote location |
WO2003036267A2 (en) | 2001-10-19 | 2003-05-01 | Monogen, Inc. | Filtration system and method for obtaining a cytology layer |
US6622874B1 (en) | 2001-11-13 | 2003-09-23 | Terry Hawkinson | Apparatus and method for holding and feeding product |
US6749071B2 (en) | 2001-12-10 | 2004-06-15 | American Greetings Corporation | Merchandizing display |
US6557385B1 (en) | 2001-12-14 | 2003-05-06 | Shoei-Yuan Shih | Safety and anti-theft door guard for a server |
US6745906B1 (en) | 2001-12-17 | 2004-06-08 | Trion Industries, Inc. | Adjustable width display rack |
US6866156B2 (en) | 2001-12-17 | 2005-03-15 | Trion Industries, Inc. | Adjustable width product display system |
US6769552B1 (en) | 2001-12-17 | 2004-08-03 | Trion Industries, Inc. | Product pusher |
JP2003204846A (en) | 2002-01-17 | 2003-07-22 | Pioneer Tekku:Kk | Display case |
JP2003210286A (en) | 2002-01-22 | 2003-07-29 | Takahara:Kk | Goods storage tool and goods storage shelf |
US6655536B2 (en) | 2002-01-31 | 2003-12-02 | Merit Jo | Merchandise display device |
US6631835B2 (en) | 2002-02-12 | 2003-10-14 | Tian Shwu Co., Ltd. | Object storing case of a motorcycle |
GB0205302D0 (en) | 2002-03-06 | 2002-04-17 | Gillette Co | Product dispensers |
US20030217980A1 (en) | 2002-03-13 | 2003-11-27 | Johnson Allen E. | Merchandising system |
JP2003265280A (en) | 2002-03-18 | 2003-09-24 | Sanden Corp | Shelving device for showcase |
US20050218094A1 (en) | 2002-03-21 | 2005-10-06 | Howerton Gary N | Pusher-type display system |
US6666533B1 (en) | 2002-03-26 | 2003-12-23 | Roseanne Stavros | Drawer organizer |
US7114606B2 (en) | 2002-05-08 | 2006-10-03 | B-O-F Corporation | Selectable width track apparatus and method for a gravity fed shelving system |
US20050072747A1 (en) | 2002-05-10 | 2005-04-07 | Roslof James P. | Merchandising system |
US6786341B2 (en) | 2002-07-09 | 2004-09-07 | Harold K. Stinnett | Article dispensing apparatus |
US7100792B2 (en) | 2002-08-30 | 2006-09-05 | Omnicell, Inc. | Automatic apparatus for storing and dispensing packaged medication and other small elements |
GB2392667B (en) * | 2002-09-07 | 2004-11-03 | Nigel Francis Gamble | Pusher apparatus for merchandise |
US20040060944A1 (en) * | 2002-09-30 | 2004-04-01 | Paul Gervasi | Theft deterring shelf aid dispensing device |
US6820754B2 (en) | 2002-10-03 | 2004-11-23 | Precision Wire Racks & Carts, Inc. | Product feed apparatus and method for shelf unit |
US7401710B2 (en) | 2002-10-04 | 2008-07-22 | Dixie-Narco, Inc. | Vending machine dispensing system |
US6854814B1 (en) | 2002-11-05 | 2005-02-15 | Intermarket Technology, Inc. | Point of sale display station |
USD485699S1 (en) | 2002-11-18 | 2004-01-27 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Paddle for a shelf system |
US8496126B2 (en) | 2002-11-18 | 2013-07-30 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Shelving system |
US6820753B2 (en) | 2002-11-21 | 2004-11-23 | Lisle Corporation | Universal disposable glove dispenser bracket |
US6830157B2 (en) | 2002-11-27 | 2004-12-14 | Display Industries, Llc. | Pie pusher merchandising display device |
DE10259397B4 (en) | 2002-12-19 | 2006-03-09 | Hbs Gmbh Zeltsysteme & Promotionausstattungen | Shelf for goods storage and presentation in retail outlets |
US7063217B2 (en) | 2002-12-23 | 2006-06-20 | Burke Display Systems, Inc. | Modular display rack having horizontally separable front barrier |
US20040140279A1 (en) | 2003-01-21 | 2004-07-22 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Shelving system |
CA2457568A1 (en) | 2003-02-12 | 2004-08-12 | B-O-F Corporation | Method and apparatus for converting gondola shelf to gravity feed shelf |
US6824009B2 (en) | 2003-02-26 | 2004-11-30 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Merchandise self-facing system with interlocking pushers |
US7111914B2 (en) | 2003-03-12 | 2006-09-26 | Maytag Corporation | Tilt-out and pick-off basket assembly for a refrigerator door |
US20050098515A1 (en) | 2003-03-18 | 2005-05-12 | Close James G. | System and method for product display, arrangement and rotation |
DE10314232A1 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2004-10-14 | Thimm Verpackung Gmbh & Co. Kg | Packaging with slider for the sales-oriented presentation of packaged goods in retail |
US7095321B2 (en) | 2003-04-14 | 2006-08-22 | American Power Conversion Corporation | Extensible sensor monitoring, alert processing and notification system and method |
US6981597B2 (en) | 2003-05-22 | 2006-01-03 | Cash James M | Storage unit and system |
EP1624779A4 (en) | 2003-05-22 | 2008-01-23 | Dci Marketing Inc | Merchandising system |
US6923330B1 (en) | 2003-06-27 | 2005-08-02 | Trion Industries, Inc. | Pull strip actuated pusher for merchandise displays |
US20050029283A1 (en) | 2003-08-08 | 2005-02-10 | Tim Pedigo | Refrigerator vending device |
US20050035858A1 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2005-02-17 | Yi-Chuan Liu | Monitoring system |
US20050279722A1 (en) | 2003-08-22 | 2005-12-22 | Ala Ali | Multiple station inventory control system |
US20050040123A1 (en) | 2003-08-22 | 2005-02-24 | Ala Ali | Inventory control system |
US20070068885A1 (en) | 2003-08-27 | 2007-03-29 | Busto Rafael T | Product display and fronting assembly |
PL206456B1 (en) | 2003-09-01 | 2010-08-31 | Mars Polska Spo & Lstrok Ka Z | Device designed to shift goods over exhibition areas |
FR2859364B1 (en) | 2003-09-08 | 2006-02-03 | Joalpe Ind De Expositores Sa | DISPLAY OF ARTICLES, IN PARTICULAR CONDITIONED FLAT |
US7097047B2 (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2006-08-29 | Dell Products L.P. | Cable management flip tray assembly |
US7355506B2 (en) | 2003-10-01 | 2008-04-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for deterring theft of electronic devices |
US20050139560A1 (en) | 2003-10-10 | 2005-06-30 | Burnes Operating Company Llc | U-channel display unit |
US6955269B2 (en) | 2003-10-13 | 2005-10-18 | Display Technologies, Llc | Weighted pusher |
US7216770B2 (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2007-05-15 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Adjustable shelving system |
US7641057B2 (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2010-01-05 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Adjustable shelving system |
US20050189369A1 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2005-09-01 | Kirk Vlastakis | Theft deterrent system |
US8485391B2 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2013-07-16 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Theft deterrent system |
US8190289B2 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2012-05-29 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Dispensing and display system |
US8215520B2 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2012-07-10 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Secure merchandising system |
US20060237381A1 (en) | 2005-04-25 | 2006-10-26 | Lockwood Thomas A | Time delay product pushing system |
US7641072B1 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2010-01-05 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Theft deterrent system |
US7032761B2 (en) | 2003-10-31 | 2006-04-25 | Trion Industries, Inc. | Product display rack with front barrier panel |
US20050161413A1 (en) | 2003-12-03 | 2005-07-28 | Close James G. | Method and apparatus for in-carton display and fronting of merchandise items |
US7201281B1 (en) | 2003-12-18 | 2007-04-10 | Imageworks Display And Marketing Group | Adjustable modular merchandise pusher system |
US7393689B2 (en) | 2004-01-27 | 2008-07-01 | Lehigh University | Method and apparatus for characterizing coal tar in soil |
US8113601B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2012-02-14 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US7451881B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2008-11-18 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US7661545B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2010-02-16 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US7621409B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2009-11-24 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US9070261B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2015-06-30 | RTC Industries, Incorporated | Product securement and management system |
US7150365B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2006-12-19 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US8047385B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2011-11-01 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US9375100B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2016-06-28 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product securement and management system |
US7792711B2 (en) | 2004-02-03 | 2010-09-07 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | System for inventory management |
US7258247B2 (en) | 2004-03-02 | 2007-08-21 | Expense Management, Inc. | Automated condiment dispensing system |
US20050199565A1 (en) | 2004-03-11 | 2005-09-15 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising system |
US6974041B2 (en) | 2004-04-09 | 2005-12-13 | Salemi Leonard E | Article stowage system |
US8997997B2 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2015-04-07 | Close-In Solutions, LLC | Apparatus and method for product display alignment |
US7980417B2 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2011-07-19 | Display Technologies | Theft resistant product merchandiser |
DE202004007373U1 (en) | 2004-05-08 | 2005-09-15 | Kesseboehmer Kg | Dispenser container for bakery products etc has goods support like drawer with toothed rods held on guide rails engaging with toothed wheels and with a support module movable in guide rails |
US6948900B1 (en) | 2004-09-10 | 2005-09-27 | Life Time Systems, Llc | Flow rack |
TWI300059B (en) | 2004-12-20 | 2008-08-21 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Anaerobic biological wastewater treatment system and process |
FR2880524B1 (en) | 2005-01-12 | 2007-03-30 | Joalpe Ind De Expositores Sa | DEVICE FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF AT LEAST ONE PRESENTATION ACCESSORY AT AN EXPOSURE SURFACE OF GOODS |
US7536752B2 (en) | 2005-01-21 | 2009-05-26 | Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc. | Rack mounted component door system and method |
US7395938B2 (en) | 2005-02-18 | 2008-07-08 | Jo A. Merit | Method and apparatus for selective engagement of shelf divider structures within a shelf management system |
US8353425B2 (en) | 2005-04-25 | 2013-01-15 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Time delay product pushing system |
US20060266762A1 (en) | 2005-05-02 | 2006-11-30 | Richard Andrews | Theft deterrent system |
AU2006252365A1 (en) | 2005-06-02 | 2006-12-07 | Coin Acceptors, Inc. | Dispenser tray for a vending machine |
US7828158B2 (en) | 2005-07-14 | 2010-11-09 | Displays Plus, Inc. | Merchandise dispensing apparatus providing theft deterrence |
US20080314847A1 (en) | 2005-07-14 | 2008-12-25 | Colelli Robert P | Vending shelf |
US7500571B2 (en) | 2005-08-04 | 2009-03-10 | Terry Hawkinson | Apparatus for holding and feeding product |
GB0517638D0 (en) | 2005-08-30 | 2005-10-05 | Kesslers Internat Ltd | Pusher apparatus |
US8739984B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2014-06-03 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
US8312999B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2012-11-20 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
US7823734B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2010-11-02 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
US9750354B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2017-09-05 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system |
US8978904B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2015-03-17 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
US8322544B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2012-12-04 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
US7419062B2 (en) | 2005-10-12 | 2008-09-02 | New Dimensions Research Corporation | Shelf unit |
US7628282B2 (en) | 2005-10-25 | 2009-12-08 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system |
US7497342B2 (en) | 2005-10-25 | 2009-03-03 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system |
US20070108146A1 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2007-05-17 | Nawrocki John R | Fences for attachment to wire shelving and related methods |
US7458473B1 (en) | 2005-12-06 | 2008-12-02 | New Dimensions Research Corporation | Display shelf |
US20070138114A1 (en) | 2005-12-20 | 2007-06-21 | Tablex Inc. | Shelf tray assembly |
US20130037562A1 (en) | 2006-01-13 | 2013-02-14 | James Garth Close | Spring driven method and apparatus for in-carton display and fronting of merchandise items |
US8038017B2 (en) | 2006-01-13 | 2011-10-18 | Close in Solutions, LLC | Spring driven method and apparatus for in-carton display and fronting of merchandise items |
US7703614B2 (en) | 2006-01-27 | 2010-04-27 | Display Technologies | Product display tray |
US7896172B1 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2011-03-01 | Hester Thomas F | Compactable product pusher system and display |
US8177076B2 (en) | 2006-02-16 | 2012-05-15 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Merchandising system |
CA2581249C (en) | 2006-03-06 | 2014-07-08 | Intier Automotive Inc. | Storage assembly |
US7198340B1 (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2007-04-03 | Maytag Corporation | Article retainer assembly for refrigerators |
US7357469B2 (en) | 2006-03-28 | 2008-04-15 | Whirlpool Corporation | Article retainer assembly for refrigerators |
US8113360B2 (en) | 2006-05-04 | 2012-02-14 | Carl Olson | Product shelf divider system and method |
JP2007307244A (en) | 2006-05-19 | 2007-11-29 | Spin:Kk | Merchandise display apparatus |
US7424957B1 (en) | 2006-05-24 | 2008-09-16 | Henschel-Steinau, Inc. | Front-loading display and dispensing apparatus |
US7708154B2 (en) | 2006-05-31 | 2010-05-04 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Dispensing system |
US7533784B2 (en) | 2006-06-12 | 2009-05-19 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Theft deterrent system hook |
US7614350B2 (en) | 2006-10-05 | 2009-11-10 | Haworth, Inc. | Wall-mounted shelf unit |
US20080142458A1 (en) | 2006-12-15 | 2008-06-19 | Excell Products, Inc. | Pusher assembly |
US7815060B2 (en) | 2007-01-04 | 2010-10-19 | Frazier Industrial Company | Case flow system with adjustable lane dividers |
US8152006B2 (en) | 2007-01-16 | 2012-04-10 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Merchandise security system |
US20110127226A1 (en) | 2007-01-16 | 2011-06-02 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Infant formula merchandiser |
US7918353B1 (en) | 2007-02-20 | 2011-04-05 | Henschel-Steinau, Inc. | Display and dispensing apparatus |
US8234752B2 (en) | 2007-02-21 | 2012-08-07 | Southco, Inc. | Sliding and rotating hinge module |
US7934607B2 (en) | 2007-03-20 | 2011-05-03 | Dell Products L.P. | Universal rack mount mechanism |
US7905364B2 (en) | 2007-06-06 | 2011-03-15 | Opher Pail | Product display system, method and apparatus |
US20090020548A1 (en) | 2007-07-18 | 2009-01-22 | Rapid Displays, Inc. | Pusher and merchandise display system |
US20090084812A1 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2009-04-02 | The Coca-Cola Company | Package Advancement System |
KR100828966B1 (en) | 2007-12-12 | 2008-05-13 | 세대산전 주식회사 | Shelf for showcase |
EP2237703A1 (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2010-10-13 | Hamlon Pty Ltd | Display unit with roller assembly shelving |
US7980398B2 (en) | 2008-03-10 | 2011-07-19 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Theft deterrent can dispenser |
US8746468B2 (en) | 2008-03-21 | 2014-06-10 | American Gasket Technologies, Inc. | Merchandise display and pusher device |
US20100107670A1 (en) | 2008-07-09 | 2010-05-06 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Ventilated merchandising system |
TWM351684U (en) | 2008-08-29 | 2009-03-01 | Shang-Ren Chen | Supporting device |
US20100059469A1 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2010-03-11 | Jeffrey Mason | Display device with slow product advancing mechanism |
US8662325B2 (en) | 2008-10-01 | 2014-03-04 | ADCO Industries—Technologies, L.P. | Shelving glide |
US20100108624A1 (en) | 2008-10-09 | 2010-05-06 | Sparkowski Robert P | Spring feed shelf display with lateral adjustment |
US20100108625A1 (en) | 2008-11-03 | 2010-05-06 | Meers Ryan C | Merchandising system |
US8376154B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2013-02-19 | Sungal Corporation | Modular gravity actuated rolling shelving assembly |
US20100176075A1 (en) | 2009-01-15 | 2010-07-15 | Nagel Thomas O | Product display with improved pull-through frame arrangements |
US8328027B2 (en) | 2009-02-11 | 2012-12-11 | Southern Imperial, Inc. | Self contained retail pusher |
ES2515266T5 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2018-12-03 | Lg Chem, Ltd. | Composition of catalyst for hydroformylation and process for the preparation of aldehydes using the same |
US20100206829A1 (en) | 2009-02-13 | 2010-08-19 | L&P Property Management Company | Product display |
EP2398358B1 (en) | 2009-02-19 | 2013-08-28 | Inventory Systems Gmbh | Feed device for the automatic shifting of objects and method for detecting a movement of a feed unit in a feed device |
US20100280655A1 (en) | 2009-03-02 | 2010-11-04 | Fawn Engineering Corporation | Apparatus, method and system for dispensing merchandise or individual selectable vendible items |
US8016139B2 (en) | 2009-04-03 | 2011-09-13 | Presence From Innovation, Llc | Glide system with adjustable dividers and modular floor members |
US8172094B2 (en) | 2009-04-08 | 2012-05-08 | Target Brands, Inc. | Product display system |
US8428774B2 (en) * | 2009-06-04 | 2013-04-23 | Checkpoint Systems, Inc. | Apparatus and method for single unit access display |
US8302783B1 (en) | 2009-08-06 | 2012-11-06 | Scott Harris | Product dispensing display |
EP2464261B1 (en) | 2009-08-14 | 2016-10-26 | POS Tuning Udo Voßhenrich GmbH & Co. KG | Product pusher unit |
US8413821B2 (en) | 2009-08-21 | 2013-04-09 | Target Brands, Inc. | Method and apparatus for securely displaying media products |
US9119488B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2015-09-01 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Secure merchandising display with blocker mechanisms |
US8788091B2 (en) | 2009-10-14 | 2014-07-22 | Giraffx Design, LLC | Dispenser for product packages |
US8684227B2 (en) | 2009-12-01 | 2014-04-01 | Invue Security Products Inc. | Merchandise display hook including helical time delay mechanism having bi-directional gear |
US20110163113A1 (en) | 2010-01-06 | 2011-07-07 | Matthew Eric Grubbs | Dispenser for round and rectangular cans |
US20130193156A1 (en) | 2010-02-04 | 2013-08-01 | Hamlon Pty Ltd | Merchandise dispensing unit |
US8800811B2 (en) | 2010-03-10 | 2014-08-12 | Southern Imperial, Inc. | Product dispensing system |
US20120048817A1 (en) | 2010-08-25 | 2012-03-01 | Diageo North America, Inc. | Shelf display device |
US8657154B2 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2014-02-25 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Loss prevention merchandiser |
US8448792B2 (en) | 2010-10-04 | 2013-05-28 | Meadwestvaco Corporation | Product dispensing system with biasing assembly |
CN102486879A (en) | 2010-12-02 | 2012-06-06 | 永晋能源科技有限公司 | Multifunctional intelligent type automatic vending machine |
US20120228242A1 (en) | 2011-03-08 | 2012-09-13 | Marketing Impact Limited | Security shelving apparatus and method for securely storing and/or dispensing retail articles |
US8646621B2 (en) | 2011-03-16 | 2014-02-11 | Meadwestvaco Corporation | Product biasing and dispensing system with security engagement |
US8910827B2 (en) | 2011-05-10 | 2014-12-16 | Rock-Tenn Shared Services, Llc | Secure merchandising display with tunnel feature |
DE102011052167B3 (en) | 2011-07-27 | 2013-01-03 | Dirk A. Brügmann Kunststoff-Verarbeitung GmbH & Co. Kommanditgesellschaft | Product output device |
US9341001B2 (en) | 2012-04-05 | 2016-05-17 | Robert Baptiste | Inventory control system |
US8844431B2 (en) | 2012-06-08 | 2014-09-30 | ADCO Industries—Technologies, L.P. | Roller Grill divider |
US8657126B1 (en) | 2012-08-27 | 2014-02-25 | Meadwestvaco Corporation | Product dispensing system with dispenser door |
US9642475B2 (en) | 2013-04-12 | 2017-05-09 | Marketing Impact Limited | Hanging product divider and pusher systems and methods for dividing, pushing and/or dispensing one or more retail products |
US9107516B2 (en) | 2013-06-11 | 2015-08-18 | Display Technologies, Llc | Merchandising system with pusher assembly |
JP5671587B2 (en) | 2013-08-22 | 2015-02-18 | 住友ゴム工業株式会社 | Ply material manufacturing method and pneumatic tire using ply material |
JP6202945B2 (en) | 2013-08-28 | 2017-09-27 | シャープ株式会社 | Washing machine |
US9848716B2 (en) | 2013-10-08 | 2017-12-26 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Vending shelf |
JP6329463B2 (en) | 2014-08-26 | 2018-05-23 | 株式会社Subaru | Vehicle control device |
US9901188B2 (en) | 2016-02-09 | 2018-02-27 | Design Productions Inc. | Anti-sweep device |
US10398238B2 (en) | 2016-03-17 | 2019-09-03 | Fasteners For Retail, Inc. | Electromechanical pusher assembly |
-
2013
- 2013-10-02 US US14/044,361 patent/US9375100B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2016
- 2016-05-26 US US15/165,470 patent/US9844280B2/en active Active
-
2017
- 2017-12-01 US US15/828,777 patent/US10349755B2/en active Active
-
2019
- 2019-06-04 US US16/431,350 patent/US11058234B2/en active Active
-
2021
- 2021-06-09 US US17/342,907 patent/US20210369007A1/en not_active Abandoned
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US10349755B2 (en) | 2019-07-16 |
US11058234B2 (en) | 2021-07-13 |
US9375100B2 (en) | 2016-06-28 |
US9844280B2 (en) | 2017-12-19 |
US20190387899A1 (en) | 2019-12-26 |
US20180078055A1 (en) | 2018-03-22 |
US20140117818A1 (en) | 2014-05-01 |
US20160270559A1 (en) | 2016-09-22 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20210369007A1 (en) | Product Securement and Management System | |
US20210321794A1 (en) | Product Securement and Management System | |
US8235222B2 (en) | Product securement and management system | |
US20140190913A1 (en) | Product Securement and Management System | |
US11375826B2 (en) | Product securement and management system | |
AU2013327132B2 (en) | Product securement and management system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO PAY ISSUE FEE |